merlin gerin - yolabeckton.yolasite.com/resources/prism/7.1_7.2_7.3 mg mccbs...new compact ns,...

Merlin GerinCompact LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors80 to 3200A

Catalogue

01

New Compact NS,setting the standard, once again...

The launch of Merlin Gerin Compact NS in 1994revolutionised the world of moulded-case circuitbreakers. Innovative, flexible and attractive, Compact NSrapidly set the standard in its field.

Today, Schneider Electric continues to innovate,extending the Compact NS range to high power ratings tooffer a comprehensive and consistent range from 80 to3200 A.

Equipped with the new generation of Micrologic controlunits, Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers integrateelectrical measurement and analysis functions.The communications option makes it possible to controlpower consumption, simplify maintenance and improveoperating comfort.

A wide range of optimised auxiliaries and accessories isalso available to meet the needs of even moreapplications.

Compact NS, simply a step ahead…

Compact NS 100 to 250 A



Compact NS 80 A


Things will never be the same

...a solution for all installation configurations

Manual Compact NS250with thermal-magnetictrip unit

Compact NS250 with motormechanism Withdrawable Compact

NS250 on chassis

...optimised protection andaccurate measurements

Compact NS1600

Micrologic 2.0, 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A,5.0 A, 6.0 A, 7.0 A

...an optimised range

...simplified installation

Connection partsfor Compact NS

General contents

2Functions and characteristics 15

Installation recommendations 131

Introduction 6

Dimensions 155

5Connection 193

Electrical diagrams 209

Additional characteristics 237

Catalogue numbers 251

9More information aboutSchneider Electric 293

1

3

4

6

7

8

6

Earth-leakage protection 4

Additional earth-leakage protection protects life and property against the risksof faulty insulation in the installation. Depending on the circuit breaker,earth-leakage protection is provided by: Adding a Vigi module to the circuit breaker Using a specific Micrologic control unit Using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids.

Compact NS,even more applications...

Protection for: Distribution systems supplied by transformers Distribution systems supplied by engine generator sets Long cables in IT and TN systems.

Installation : In power switchboards

Special applications: Single-phase and two-phase systems (see page 36) 1000 V distribution systems (see page 38) 400 Hz distribution systems (see page 40) DC systems (see page 42).

All circuit breakers in the Compact NS range offer positive contact indicationand are suitable for isolation in compliance with standards IEC 60947-1 and 2.

Protection of LV distribution systems Page 18

Protection of industrial control panels Page 52

Protection of motor feeders Page 44

When combined with a motor starter, Compact NS circuit breakers protect thecables and the starter against short-circuits. Equipped with an electronic trip unit,Compact NS circuit breakers also protect the cables, starter and motor againstoverloads.The exceptional current-limiting capacity of Compact NS circuit breakersautomatically ensures type-2 coordination with the motor starter, in compliance withstandard IEC 60947-4-1.

The different circuit-breaker versions in the Compact NS range are designed tomeet the specific requirements of machines: Compliance with international standards IEC 60947-2 and

UL 508 / CSA 22-2 No. 14 Compliance with U.S. standard UL 489 Protection against overloads and short-circuits Positive contact indication Installation in universal and functional enclosures.

1

7

N R

Source-changeover systems 6 (see also the "Source-changeover systems" catalogue)

To ensure a continuous supply of power, some electrical installations areconnected to two power sources: A normal source A replacement source on hand to supply the installation when the normal

source is not available.

A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Interpact, Compactor Masterpact devices avoids all risk of parallel connection of the sources duringswitching.

A source-changeover system can be: Manual with mechanical interlocking between the devices Remote operated when an electrical interlocking function in added Automatic when a controller is added to manage switching from one source to

the other on the basis of external parameters.

UL 489 applications

Compact NS circuit breakers also meet the requirements of applications governedby standard UL 489 (see the corresponding catalogue).

Switch-disconnectors Page 58

A switch-disconnector version of Compact NS circuit breakers exists for circuitcontrol and isolation.All the additional functions may be combined with the basic switch-disconnectorfunction, including: Earth-leakage protection Motor mechanism Ammeter, etc.

For information on other switch-disconnector ranges, see the Interpact (offeringpositive contact indication and visible break) and Fupact (fuse switch) catalogues.

1

8

compact

NS 250 LUi750V Uimp8kVUe(V)

Icu(kA)

220/240380/415440500525660/690250

150150130

705020

100

cat A

Ics = 100 % Icu

IEC 947-2UTE VDE BS CEI UNE NEMA

L: very high breakingcapacity

compact

NS 250 NUi750V Uimp8kVUe(V)

Icu(kA)

220/240380/415440500525660/690250

8536353022

850

cat A

Ics = 100 % Icu


N: standard breakingcapacity

compact

NS 250 HUi750V Uimp8kVUe(V)

Icu(kA)

220/240380/415440500525660/690250

100706550351085

cat A

Ics = 100 % Icu


...a solution for allinstallation configurations

The Compact NS range now covers allratings from 80 to 3200 A: Compact NS80 to 1600 A, fixed,

withdrawable, front or rearconnections, manual or electricaloperation.

Compact NS1600 to 3200 A, fixed,front connection, manual operation.

H: high breaking capacity

The rating plates on the frontpanel of each device indicatethe breaking capacity(N, H or L).

Total discriminationas standard

Compact NS100 to 630

Compact NS630b to 1600


Discrimination between Compact NS circuit breakersis total for all types of faults (overloads, high or low short-circuits) and whatever the type of trip unit used withthe circuit breaker.

Breaking capacityIcu at 415 V



1

9

Manual Compact NS250with thermal-magnetictrip unit

Manually operated Compact NS800 Electrically operated Compact NS800

Compact NS250 with motormechanism

Compact NS400 withelectronic trip unit

Withdrawable CompactNS250 on chassis

Plug-in Compact NS250on base

Compact NS2000 (manually operated only)

1Compact NS100 to 630



10

Compact circuit breakers make itpossible to standardise switchboards forfaster installation.All type L Compact circuit breakers(150 kA) are housed in the same caseas the type N and type H modelswith the same ratings.Compact circuit breakers up to 1600 Acan be easily installed side-by-sidein a minimum amount of space.

...simplified installation

5 frame sizes from 80 to 3200 A

Connection partsfor Compact NS

80 A 100 to 250 A 400 to 630 A

630 to 1600 A 1600 to 3200 A

Many connectionpossibilitiesNumerous connection possibilities, including front andrear connections for bare cables, cable lugs or bars,as well as plug-in or withdrawable versions, areavailable using accessories that can be rapidly addedto the circuit breaker.

Plug-in and withdrawableversionsPlug-in and withdrawable versions for:c Fast removal or insertion of the circuit breaker

without exposure to live partsc Standby outgoing circuits ready for wiring and

circuit breaker installation at a later datec Visible break possibility.

BuswaysCompact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A can beinstalled in tap-off units of the Telemecanique Canalisrange of busbar trunking.

1

11

Compact NS100 to 630On Compact NS100 to NS250 circuit breakers, the thermal-magnetic andelectronic trip units are interchangeable and may be rapidly fitted to the circuitbreakers. It is therefore easy to change the protection of a given circuit following amodification in an installation.On Compact NS400 and NS630 circuit breakers, the electronic trip units areinterchangeable, plug-in modules. The STR53UE trip unit offers a large numberof protection settings:Standard: Specific indication of the different types of faults (overloads, short-circuits, etc.)Optional: Built-in ammeter Earth-fault protection Communication: transmission of all information concerning circuit-breaker

operation to an electrical distribution control, monitoring and automationsystem via Digipact modules (see page 70)

Compact NS630b to 3200Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers are equipped with Micrologic controlunits that are interchangeable on site.

Micrologic 2.0 and 2.0 A control units offer standard protection. Micrologic 5.0 and5.0 A control units offer selective protection that can be completed by earth-faultprotection on Micrologic 6.0 A and earth-leakage protection on Micrologic 7.0 Acontrol units.

The ammeter version of Micrologic control units provides current measurements.These units are equipped with a digital display and bargraph, used in conjunctionwith simple navigation buttons. Access to the desired parameters and settingsis direct and navigation between screens is intuitive. Settings are greatly simplifiedby direct display on the screen.

...optimised protectionand accurate measurements

Each Compact NS circuit breakerprovides different types of protection,depending on the trip unit or control unitselected.Additional measurement and indicationfunctions are available:c On Compact NS100 to 630, by adding

an electrical auxiliary to the circuitbreaker

c On Compact NS630b to 3200,depending on the Micrologic controlunit selected.

STR electronic trip unit

TM thermal-magnetictrip unit

Compact NS250

Compact NS1600Micrologic 2.0, 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A,

5.0 A, 6.0 A, 7.0 A

Ammeter module

Voltage presence indicationmodule

1

12

2

1

7 8

12

15

16

14

10

11

2

3

6

4

9

13

5

...an optimised range

A complete system of add-on modules forCompact NS:Fewer catalogue numbers means immediateavailability of parts for all solutions.Trip units, control units, auxiliaries and installationand connection accessories are the same for a givenframe size and often for a number of frame sizes (e.g.auxiliary contacts, MN and MX voltage releases, etc.): Compact NS80 Compact NS100 to NS250 Compact NS400 to NS630 Compact NS630b to 1600 Compact 1600b to 3200.

1 Breaking unit2 Trip units or control units3 Vigi earth-leakage protection module4 Insulation monitoring module5 Voltage presence indicator6 Ammeter module7 MN and MX voltage releases8 Multifunction auxiliary contact9 Direct rotary handle10 Extended rotary handle11 Motor mechanism12 Plug-in base13 Connection of auxiliary circuits to plug-in base or withdrawable chassis14 Connection accessories15 Short terminal shields16 Long terminal shields

1

13

Schneider Electric fully takes into account environmental requirements, startingright from the design stage of products through to the end of their service life: The materials used for Compact NS are not dangerous for the environment The production facilities are non-polluting in compliance with the ISO 14001

standard Filtered breaking for the high ratings eliminates pollution in the switchboard The energy dissipated per pole is low, making energy losses insignificant The materials are marked to facilitate sorting for recycling at the end of product

service life.

Digipact installation-management system

Open communication ...

Equipped with a communications option, Compact NScircuit breakers fit perfectly in the Digipact installationmanagement system or other supervision systems.Via a PC or a PLC, the operator can: Display the status of each circuit breaker and its

settings Control the circuit breakers Display faults Access measurements supplied by the electronic

control units.

... and protection of the environment

Management

ModBus / JBus

DC150 data concentrator

PM150 powermeter

Circuit breakeror other poweractuator

CLS150 indicationand local-controlmodule

Multi 9 controldevice andATB 1Sinterface

UA150 automaticsource-changeovercontroller

RMH earth-leakage monitor

Digipact internal bus

RHU residual-current relay withseparate toroid

...modern products

1

15

2

Functions and characteristics

Presentation 8

General characteristics 16Protection of distribution systemsOverview of solutions 18Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A 20Compact NS circuit breakers from 630 up to 3200 A 22TM and STR trip units for Compact NS100 to 250 24MP and STR trip units for Compact NS400 to 630 26Micrologic control units for Compact NS630b to 3200 30Special cases: Single-phase and two-phase systems 36 1000 V systems 38 400 Hz applications 40 Circuit breaker selection for DC applications 42Motor protectionOverview of solutions 44Compact NS80H-MA 46NS100 to 630 circuit breakers with MA magnetic trip units 47NS100 to 250 circuit breakers with STR22ME electronic trip unit 48NS400 to 630 circuit breakers with STR43ME electronic trip unit 50Protection of industrial control panelsOverview of solutions 52Circuit breaker NSC100N 53Trip units, auxiliaries, installation enclosures 54UL508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 marking 55Earth-leakage protectionOverview of solutions 56Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact) for Compact NS100 to 630 57Control and isolationOverview of solutions 58Compact NSC100 and NS100 to 630NA switch-disconnectors 60Compact NS630bNA to 1600NA switch-disconnectors 62Compact NS1600b to 3200NA switch-disconnectors 64Source-changeover systemsPresentation 66Manual source-changeover systems 67Remote-operated systems 68Controllers 69CommunicationCOM option in Compact 70Compact in a communication network 74Installation, connection and accessoriesCompact NS80H-MA, NSC100N 78Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 84Compact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable version) 85Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) 104Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version) 105Compact NS1600b to 3200 (fixed version) 124Test equipment 129

Installation recommendations 131Dimensions 155Connection 193Electrical diagrams 209Additional characteristics 237Catalogue numbers 251More information about Schneider Electric 292

Compact NS

Selection of a Compact NS circuit breakerdepends on the application requiring protection(distribution systems, motor feeders, etc.) and onthe prescribed installation conditions (see section“Installation, connection and accessories”).

16

2

Compliance with standardsCompact NS circuit breakers and auxiliaries comply with the following: International recommendations: IEC 60947-1 - general rules IEC 60947-2 - circuit breakers IEC 60947-3 - switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, etc. IEC 60947-4 - contactors and motor starters IEC 60947-5.1 and following - control circuit devices and switching elements;

automatic control components European (EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-2) and the corresponding national

standards: France NF Germany VDE U.K. BS Australia AS Italy CEI the specifications of the marine classification companies (Veritas, Lloyd’s

Register of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.) French standard NF C 79-130 and the recommendations issued by the

CNOMO organisation for the protection of machine tools.For U.S. UL, Canadian CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards, pleaseconsult us.

Pollution degreeCompact NS circuit breakers are certified for operation in pollution-degree IIIenvironments as defined by IEC standard 60947 (industrial environments).

TropicalisationCompact NS circuit breakers have successfully passed the tests prescribed by thefollowing standards for extreme atmospheric conditions: IEC 68-2-1 - dry cold (-55° C) IEC 68-2-2 - dry heat (+85° C) IEC 68-2-30 - damp heat (95% relative humidity at 55°C) IEC 68-2-52 - salt mist (severity level 2).

Environmental protectionCompact NS circuit breakers take into account important concerns forenvironmental protection. Most components are recyclable and the parts ofCompact NS630b to NS3200 circuit breakers are marked as specified in applicablestandards.

Ambient temperature Compact NS circuit breakers may be used between -25° C and +70° C.

For temperatures higher than 40° C (65° C for circuit breakers used to protectmotor feeders), devices must be derated as indicated in the documentation.

Circuit-breakers should be put into service under normal ambient operatingtemperature conditions. Exceptionally, the circuit breaker may be put intoservice when the ambient temperature is between -35° C and -25° C.

The permissible storage-temperature range for Compact NS circuit breakers inthe original packing is -50° C (1) to +85° C.

DiscriminationAs standard, the Compact NS range ensures discrimination between two circuitbreakers positioned in series in an installation.

MERLIN GERINcompactNS160 HUi 750V. Uimp 8kV.Ue(V)220/240380/415440500/525660/690250

Icu(kA)1007065501085

cat AIcs = 100% Icu

IEC 947.2UTE VDE BS CEI UNE NEMA

Standardised characteristics indicated on the rating plate:Ui: rated insulation voltageUimp: rated impulse withstand voltageIcu: ultimate breaking capacity, for various values

of the rated operational voltage Uecat: utilisation categoryIcw: rated short-time withstand currentIcs: service breaking capacity

suitable for isolation

Functions andcharacteristics

General characteristics

(1) -40° C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen.

CB2

CB1

17

2

Positive contact indicationAll Compact NS circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defined in IECstandard 60947-2: The isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position The operating handle cannot indicate the “OFF” position unless the contacts

are effectively open Padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open.Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliabilityof the position-indication system.The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing: The mechanical reliability of the position indication system The absence of leakage currents Overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream

connections.

Installation in class II switchboardsAll Compact NS circuit breakers are class II front face devices. They may beinstalled through the door of class II switchboards (as per IEC standard 60664),without downgrading switchboard insulation. Installation requires no specialoperations, even when the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle or amotor mechanism.

Degree of protectionAs per standards IEC 60529 (IP degree of protection) and EN 50102(IK degree of protection against external mechanical impacts).

Bare circuit breaker with terminal shieldsWith toggle IP40 IK07

With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07standard / VDE

Circuit breaker installed in a switchboardWith toggle IP40 IK07

With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07standard / VDEMCC IP435CNOMO IP547

With extended rotary handle IP55 IK08

With motor mechanism IP40 IK07

18


2Power distributionSelection of circuit breakers up to 630 A Page 20Rated current (A) 12.5 … 12.5 … 12.5 … 60… 250…

100 160 250 400 630Compact NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630

Breaking capacity N 25 36 36 45 45(kA rms) H 70 70 70 70 70380/415 V L 150 150 150 150 150

Accompanying trip units up to 630 A Page 24Interchangeable thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units for NS100 to 630

Selection of circuit breakers from 630 to 3200 A Page 22Rated current (A) 250 … 320 … 400 … 500… 640…

630 800 1000 1250 1600Compact NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600

Breaking capacity N 50 50 50 50 50(kA rms) H 70 70 70 70 70380/415 V L 150 150 150 - -

Rated current (A) 640 … 800 ... 1000 … 1250 …1600 2000 2500 3200

Compact NS1600bNS2000 NS2500 NS3200

Breaking capacity N 70 70 70(kA rms) H 85 85 85380/415 V

Accompanying control units up to 3200 A Page 30Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to 3200 circuitbreakers and can be changed on site.

Protection of distribution systemsOverview of solutions

Protection of distribution systems meansprotection of:c Systems supplied by a transformerc Systems supplied by an engine

generator setc Long cables in IT and TN systems.

Special case of DC systems:TM thermal-magnetic trip units for Compact NS100to 250 and MP magnetic trip units for CompactNS400 and 630 may be used to protect DCdistribution systems.

G

+

19

2

Power distribution (cont.)

Single-phase or two-phase distribution Page 36Rated current (A) 16… 100 125… 160 160… 250

Compact NS100 1P/2P NS160 1P/2P NS250 1PBuilt-in thermal-magnetictrip units

Breaking capacity 1P 2P 1P 2P 1P(kA rms) 220 V N 25 85 25 85 25

H 40 100 40 100 -

1000 V distribution Page 38Rated current (A) 60… 400

Compact NS400 1000VBreaking capacity:10 kA rms at 1000 V

STR23SP electronic trip unitspecially designed for1000 V applications

20


2

Compact circuit breakersNumber of polesControl manual toggle

direct or extended rotary handleelectric

Connections fixed front connectionrear connection

plug-in (on base) front connectionrear connection

withdrawable (on chassis) front connectionrear connection

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2Rated current (A) In 40 °C

65 °CRated insulation voltage (V) UiRated impulse withstand voltage kV) UimpRated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz

DCType of circuit breakerUltimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220/240 V

50/60 Hz 380/415 V440 V500 V525 V660/690 V

DC 250 V (1P)500 V (2P in series)

Service breaking capacity lcs % IcuSuitability for isolationUtilisation categoryEndurance (cycles F/0) mechanical

electrical 440 V In/2In

Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V

480 V600 V

Electrical characteristics as per UL508Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V

480 V600 V

ProtectionTrip unitsOverload protection long time Ir (In x …)Short-circuit protection short time lsd (Ir x …)

instantaneous Ii (In x …)Earth-fault protection lg (In x …)Zone selective interlocking ZSIAdd-on earth-leakage protection add-on Vigi module

combination with Vigirex relayCurrent measurements

Additional measurement, indication and control auxiliariesIndication contactsMX shunt and MN undervoltage releasesVoltage-presence indicatorCurrent-transformer module and ammeter moduleInsulation-monitoring module

Remote communication by busDevice-status indicationDevice remote operationTransmission of settingsIndication and identification of protection devices and alarmsTransmission of measured current values

InstallationAccessories terminal extensions and spreaders

terminal shields and interphase barriersescutcheons

Dimensions (mm) W x H x D fixed, front connections 2-3P / 4P

Weight (kg) fixed, front connections 3P / 4P

Source changeover system (see section on source changeover systems)

Protection of distribution systemsCompact NS circuit breakersup to 630 A

Compact NS250H

Compact NS630L

(1) 2P in 3P case for type N only(2) specific trip units are available for operationalvoltages > 525 V(3) operational voltage i 500 V.

21

2

NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS6302(1), 3, 4 2(1), 3, 4 2(1), 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 c c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c c

100 160 250 400 630100 150 220 320 500750 750 750 750 7508 8 8 8 8690 690 690 690 690500 500 500 500 500N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 15025 70 150 36 70 150 36 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 15025 65 130 35 65 130 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 13018 50 100 30 50 70 30 50 70 30 50 100 30 50 7018 35 100 22 35 50 22 35 50 22 35 100 22 35 508 10 75 8 10 20 8 10 20 10(2) 20(2) 75(2) 10(2) 20(2) 35(2)

50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 - 85 - - 85 -50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 - 85 - - 85 -100% 100% 100% 100% 100%(3)

c c c c cA A A A A50 000 40 000 20 000 15 000 15 00050 000 40 000 20 000 12 000 8 00030 000 20 000 10 000 6 000 4 000

N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 20025 65 130 35 65 130 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 13010 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50

N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L85 85 - 85 85 - 85 85 - 85 85 - 85 85 -25 65 - 35 65 - 35 65 - 42 65 - 42 65 -10 10 - 10 10 - 18 18 - 18 18 - 30 30 -

TM (thermal-magnetic) STR22 (electronic) STR23 (electronic) STR53 (electronic)c c c c- c c cc c c c- - - c- - - cc c c cc c c c- - - c

c cc cc cc cc c

c c c cc c c c- - - c- - - c- - - c

c cc cc c105 x 161 x 86 / 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110 / 185 x 255 x 110

1.6 to 1.9 / 2.1 to 2.3 6.0 / 7.8

22


2

Protection of distribution systemsCompact NS circuit breakersfrom 630 up to 3200 A

(1) 65°C with vertical connections. See the temperaturederating tables for other types of connections.

Compact NS800H

Compact NS2000H



Type of circuit breakerConnections fixed front connection

rear connectionwithdrawable (on chassis) front connection

rear connection

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2Rated current (A) In 50 °C

65 °C (1)

Rated insulation voltage (V) UiRated impulse withstand voltage (kV) UimpRated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz

DCType of circuit breakerUltimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220/240 V

50/60 Hz 380/415 V440 V500/525 V660/690 V

DC 250 V500 V

Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs Value or % IcuShort-time withstand current (kA rms) lcw 0.5 sV AC 50/60 Hz 1 sSuitability for isolationUtilisation categoryEndurance (C-O cycles) mechanical


690 V In/2In

Pollution degree

Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1Breaking capacity at 60 Hz (kA) 240 V

480 V600 V

Protection and measurementsInterchangeable control unitsOverload protection long time Ir (In x …)Short-circuit protection short time Isd (Ir x …)

instantaneous Ii (In x …)Earth-fault protection lg (In x …)Residual earth-leakage protection I nZone selective interlocking ZSIProtection of the fourth poleCurrent measurements

Additional indication and control auxiliariesIndication contactsVoltage releases MX shunt release

MN undervoltage release




Dimensions fixed devices, front connections (mm) 3PH x W x D 4PWeight fixed devices, front connections (kg) 3P

4P

Source changeover system (see section on source changeover systems)Manual, remote-operated and automatic source changeover systems

23

2

NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600 NS1600b NS2000 NS2500 NS32003, 4 3, 4 3, 4c c cc c -c c -N H L N H N Hc c c c c c cc c c c c - -c c c c c - -c c c c c - -

630 800 1000 1250 1600 1600 2000 2500 3200630 800 1000 1250 1510 1550 1900 2500 2970750 750 7508 8 8690 690 690500 500 500N H L N H N H50 70 150 50 70 85 12550 70 150 50 70 70 8550 65 130 50 65 65 8540 50 100 40 50 65 -30 42 25 30 42 65 -- - - - - - -- - - - - - -75% 50% 100% 75% 50% 65 kA 75%25 25 10 25 25 40 4017 17 7 17 17 28 28c c cB B A B B B B10000 10000 60006000 5000 5000 30005000 4000 2000 20004000 3000 2000 20002000 2000 1000 1000III III III

N H L N H N H50 65 125 50 65 - 85 125 -35 50 100 35 50 - 65 85 -25 50 - 25 50 - 50 - -

Micrologic 2.0 Micrologic 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A Micrologic 5.0 A Micrologic 6.0 A Micrologic 7.0 Ac c c c c c- c - c c cc c c c c c- - - - c -- - - - - c- - c c c cc c c c c c- - c c c c

c cc cc c

c c c c c cc c c c - -- - c c c c- - c c c c- - c c c c

c -c -c c327 x 210 x 147 350 x 420 x 160327 x 280 x 147 350 x 535 x 16014 2418 36

c

24


2

13 16 25 40 63 80 100 125 200 250

TM-D

STR22SE

TM-G

STR22GE

TM-D

TM-G

Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers,types N, H and L, may be equipped witheither a TM thermal-magnetic trip unit or anSTR22 electronic trip unit. A mechanicalmismatch-protection system avoidsbreaker and trip unit mismatches.

Standard protection Protection of systemssupplied by generators.Protection of longcables

Protection of DCdistribution systems

Protection of distribution systemsTM and STR trip unitsfor Compact NS100 to 250

TM thermal-magnetic trip units

ProtectionThe protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.

Overload protectionThermal protection with an adjustable threshold.

Short-circuit protectionMagnetic protection with a fixed or adjustable pick-up, depending on the rating.

Protection of the fourth poleOn four-pole circuit breakers, the trip units can be of the,4P 3d type (neutral unprotected),4P 3d + N/2 type (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d type (neutral protection at In).

1 overload protection threshold2 short-circuit protection pick-up

ImIr

x 250A x 250A

1 .8.9

9

8 7

6

10 5

ImIr

TM 250 D250A / 40°C

1 2

I

t

0 Ir Im

2

1

TM thermal-magnetic trip units TM16D to 250D TM16G to 63GRatings (A) In at 40 °C 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 16 25 40 63

Compact NS100 c c c c c c c c - - - - c c c cCompact NS160 c c c c c c c c c c - - c c c cCompact NS250 c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c

Overload protection (thermal)Current setting (A) Ir adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In

Short-circuit protection (magnetic)Current setting (A) Im fixed adjustable fixed

Compact NS100 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 63 80 80 125Compact NS160/250 190 300 400 500 500 500 1000 1250 1250 1250 5 to 10 x In 63 80 80 125

Protection of the fourth poleNeutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protectionNeutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/2 56 56 63 0.5 x IrNeutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1 x Ir

25

2

STR22 electronic trip units


Overload protectionTrue rms long-time protection with an adjustable threshold.

Short-circuit protectionShort-time and instantaneous protection:c Short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay;c Instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up.

Protection of the fourth poleOn four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switchto 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d(neutral protection at In).

IndicationsA LED on the front indicates the percent load:c ON - load is > 90% of Ir settingc Flashing - load is > 105% of Ir setting.

TestA mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on thefront to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.

1 long-time threshold (overload protection)2 long-time tripping delay3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection)4 short-time tripping delay5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection)6 test connector7 percent load indication

Protection of the fourth pole

test

+

In=100A

1 67

ImIr

STR 22 SE

Im

x Ir

1023

45 6

7

8

Ir

x Io

1.8.85

.88.9 .93

.95

.98

-

90105

alarm

Io

x In

.5.63

.7.8 .9

1

3

%Ir

I

t

0 Ir Im

1

2

3

45

STR electronic trip units STR22SE STR22GERatings (A) In 20 to 70 °C (*) 40 80 100 160 250(*) 40 100 160 250(*)Circuit breaker Compact NS100 N/H/L c - c - - n n - -

Compact NS160 N/H/L c c c c - n n n -Compact NS250 N/H/L c c c c c n n n n

Overload protection (Long Time)Current setting Ir = In x … 0.4...1 0.4...1

48 settings 48 settingsTime delay (s) at 1.5 x Ir 90...180 12…15(min.…max.) at 6 x Ir 5...7.5 -

at 7.2 x Ir 3.2...5.0 -

Short-circuit protection (Short Time)Pick-up (A) Im = Ir x … 2...10 2...10Accuracy ± 15 % 8 settings 8 settingsTime delay (ms) fixed fixed

max. resettable time i 40 i 40max. break time i 60 i 60

Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous)Pick-up (A) Ii fixed u 11 x In fixed u 11 x In

Protection of the fourth poleNeutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection -Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/2 0.5 x Ir -Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir -

(*) If the STR22SE and STR22GE 250 A trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of thecircuit breaker. The overload protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60° C or 0.9 at 70° C.

Setting exampleWhat is the overload-protection threshold of aCompact NS250 circuit breaker equipped with anSTR22SE 160 A trip unit set to Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8 ?

Answer:In x Io x Ir = 160 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 64 A. x In

Ir

x Io

.8

.85

.9.95

1

.88.93

.98

Io

.5

.63.7

.91

.8

26


2

60 250 400 500 630

STR23SE / STR53UE

STR23SE / STR53UE

MP

STR23SV / STR53SV

Protection of distribution systemsMP and STR trip unitsfor Compact NS400 to 630

Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers,types N, H and L, 3-pole and 4-pole, maybe equipped with any of the STR23SE,STR23SV, STR53UE and STR53SVelectronic trip units.The STR53UE and STR53SV trip unitsoffer a wider range of settings and theSTR53UE offers a number of optionalprotection, measurement andcommunications functions.For DC applications, the Compact NS400Hand 630H circuit breakers are equippedwith a built-in MP magnetic trip unit.

Protection of systems supplied bygenerators. Protection of long cables

Protection of systems U > 525 V

Standard protectionwith selectivity

Protection of DCdistribution systems

Selection of the trip unit depends on the type of distribution system protected andthe operational voltage of the circuit breaker.

Protection for all types of circuits, from 60 to 630 A, is possible with only fourtrip-unit catalogue numbers, whatever the circuit-breaker operational voltage:c U i 525 V: STR23SE or STR53UEc U > 525 V: STR23SV or STR53SV.

Trip units do not have a predefined rating. The tripping threshold depends on thecircuit breaker rating and the LT (long time) current setting.For example, for an STR23SE trip unit set to the maximum value, the trippingthreshold is:c 250 A, when installed on a Compact NS400 250 Ac 630 A, when installed on a Compact NS630.

STR23SE (U < 525 V) and STR23SV (U > 525 V)

electronic trip units


Overload protectionLong-time protection with an adjustable threshold and fixed tripping delay:c Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1)c Ir fine adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1).

Short-circuit protectionShort-time and instantaneous protection:c Short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delayc Instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up.


IndicationsA LED on the front indicates the percent load:c ON - load is > 90% of Ir settingc Flashing - load is > 105% of Ir setting.


t

I0 Ir Im

1

2

3

45

IsdIr

STR 23 SE

Ir

x Io

Io

-test

+

90105 %Iralarm

x In

6 1 37

.5

.63.7

.91

.8

.85

.9.95

1

.88.93

.98

.8

2

34

5 678

10

Isd

x Ir

1 long-time threshold (overload protection)2 long-time tripping delay3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection)4 short-time tripping delay5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection)6 test connector7 percent load indication

27

2

STR53UE (U < 525 V) and STR53SV (U > 525 V)

electronic trip units


Overload protectionLong-time protection with adjustable threshold and tripping delay:c Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1)c Ir fine adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1).

Short-circuit protectionShort-time and instantaneous protection:c Short-time protection with adjustable pick-up and tripping delay,

with or without constant I2tc Instantaneous protection with adjustable pick-up.


Overload LED (% Ir)A LED on the front indicates the percent load:c When ON, the load is > 90% of Ir settingc When flashing, the load is > 105% of Ir setting.

Fault indicationsA LED signals the type of fault:c Overload (long-time protection) or abnormal internal temperature (Ir)c Short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (Isd)c Earth fault (if earth-fault protection option installed) (Ig)c Microprocessor malfunction:c Both (Ig) and (Isd) LEDs ONc (Ig) LED ON (if earth-fault protection option (T) installed).Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. The LEDindicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten minutes to conservebattery power. The information is however stored in memory and the LED can beturned back ON by pressing the battery/LED test pushbutton. The LEDautomatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit breaker is reset.

TestA mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on thefront to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.The test pushbutton tests the battery and the (% Ir), (Ir), (Isd) and (Ig) LEDs.

Self monitoringThe circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperatureis detected.

OptionsFour options are available:c Earth-fault protection Tc Ammeter Ic Zone selective interlocking ZSIc Communications option COM.

t

0 Ir Isd Ii I

5

43

2

1

67

> Ih

> Im

> Ir

µ P

faulttestSTR 53 UE

Io

x In

-test

+

32 4 5

8 16

16

4

2

1

(s) @ 6 Ir

.3 .3.2

.1

0

.2

.1

0on I2 t off

.9 .93.95

.98

1

.88

.85

.8

.8 .9

1

.7

.6

.5

14 5

6

8

10

3

2

1.5

4 68

10

11

3

2

1.5

.5 .6.7

.8

1

.4

.3

.2x Io

Ir Isd

x Ir

Ii

x In

Ig

x In

tr tsd(s)

.4 .4.3

.2

.1

.3

.2

.1on I 2t off

tg(s)

%Ir >Ir >Isd >Ig

A

In I1 I2 I3 IsdIr li

tr

tsd

8 6 79(*) (*)1

1 long-time threshold (overload protection)2 long-time tripping delay3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection)4 short-time tripping delay5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection)6 optional earth-fault pick-up7 optional earth-fault tripping delay8 test connector9 battery and lamp test pushbutton

Earth-fault protection (T) (see the “Options forthe STR53UE electronic trip unit” section on thefollowing pages).With the earth-fault option (T) on the STR53UEelectronic trip unit, an external neutral sensor canbe installed. Available ratings of external neutralsensors: 150, 250, 400, 630 A.

28


2

Trip units STR23SE (U i 525V) STR53UE (U i 525V)

STR23SV (U > 525V) STR53SV (U > 525V)Ratings (A) In 20 to 70 ° C (1) 150 250 400 630 150 250 400 630Circuit breaker Compact NS400 N/H/L c c c - c c c -

Compact NS630 N/H/L - - - c - - - cOverload protection (Long time)

Current setting Ir = In x … 0.4...1 0.4...1adjustable, 48 settings adjustable, 48 settings

Time delay (s) fixed adjustable(min.…max.) at 1.5 x Ir 90...180 8...15 34...50 69...100 138...200 277...400

at 6 x Ir 5...7.5 0.4...0.5 1.5...2 3...4 6...8 12...16at 7.2 Ir 3.2...5.0 0.2...0.74 1...1.4 2...2.8 4...5.5 8.2...11

Short-circuit protection (Short time)Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 2...10 1.5...10accuracy ± 15 % adjustable, 8 settings adjustable, 8 settingsTime delay (ms) fixed adjustable, 4 settings + "constant I2t" option

max. resettable time < 40 < 15 < 60 < 140 < 230max. break time < 60 < 60 < 140 < 230 < 350

Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)Pick-up (A) Ii = In x … 11 1.5...11

fixed adjustable, 8 settings

Protection of the fourth poleNeutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protectionNeutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/2 0.5 x Ir 0.5 x IrNeutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1 x Ir

OptionsIndication of fault type - c (standard)Zone selective interlocking ZSI - c (2)

Communications COM - c (2)

Built-in ammeter I - c (2)

Earth-fault protection T - c (2)

(1) If the trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker. The overloadprotection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60° C or 0.9 at 70° C for the Compact NS400, and 0.95 at 50° C, 0.9 at 60° C or 0.85 at 70° C for the Compact NS630.(2) This option is not available for the STR53SV trip unit.

Protection of distribution systemsMP and STR trip unitsfor Compact NS400 to 630 (cont.)

Setting exampleWhat is the overload-protection threshold of aCompact NS400 circuit breaker equipped withan STR23SE (or STR23SV) trip unit setto Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8 ?

Answer.In x Io x Ir = 400 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 160 A.The identical trip unit, with identical settings butinstalled on a Compact NS630 circuit breaker, willhave an overload-protection threshold of:630 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 250 A.

x In

Ir

x Io

.8

.85

.9.95

1

.88.93

.98

Io

.5

.63.7

.91

.8

29

2

Options for the STR53UE electronic trip unit

Earth-fault protection (T)Type Residual

Pick-up Ig = In x … 0.2 to 1Accuracy ± 15% adjustable, 8 settingsTime delay adjustable, 4 settings“constant I2t” function max. resettable time 60 140 230 350

max. break time < 140< 230 < 350 < 500

Ammeter (I)A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatestload. The value of each current (I1, I2, I3, Ineutral) may be successively displayedby pressing a scroll button.LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed.

Ammeter display limits:c Minimum current > 0.2 x In. Lower currents are not displayedc Maximum current < 10 x In.

Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)A number of circuit breakers are interconnected one after another by a pilot wire.In the event of a short-time or earth fault:c If a given STR53UE trip unit detects the fault, it informs the upstream circuit

breaker, which applies the set time delayc If the STR53UE trip unit does not detect the fault, the upstream circuit breaker

trips after its shortest time delay.In this manner, the fault is cleared rapidly by the nearest circuit breaker.The thermal stresses on the circuits are minimised and time discrimination ismaintained throughout the installation.The STR53UE trip unit can handle only the downstream end of a zone selectiveinterlocking function. Consequently, the ZSI option cannot be implementedbetween two Compact NS circuit breakers.

Opto-electronic outputsUsing opto-transistors, these outputs ensure total isolation between the internalcircuits of the trip unit and the circuits wired by the user.

Communications option (COM)This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules.

Transmitted data:c Settingsc Phase and neutral currents (rms values)c Highest current of the three phasesc Overload-condition alarmc Cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.).

MP DC trip units

Magnetic trip units for Compact NS400/630 three-pole, type H circuit breakers.These trip units are specifically designed to protect DC distribution systems.

They are not interchangeable. The circuit breaker and trip unit are suppliedfully assembled.

Built-in trip units MP1 MP2 MP3Circuit breaker Compact NS400H c c -

Compact NS630H c c cShort-circuit protection (magnetic)

Pick-up (A) Im adjustable adjustable adjustable800...1600 1250...2500 2000...4000

Possiblecombinations:c Ic Tc I + Tc I + COMc I + T + COM

c ZSIc ZSI + Ic ZSI + Tc ZSI + I + Tc ZSI +I + COMc ZSI + I + T + COM

ImIn

Im(A)

2000

3800

4400 5000

5700

4000

25003000

3500

30


2

Protection of distribution systemsMicrologic control unitsfor Compact NS630b to 3200

1 long-time threshold and tripping delay2 overload alarm (LED)3 short-time pick-up and tripping delay4 instantaneous pick-up5 fixing screw for long-time rating plug6 test connector

ProtectionProtection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials.Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a differentlong-time rating plug.

Overload protectionTrue rms long-time protection.Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping.

Short-circuit protectionShort-time (rms) and instantaneous protection.Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay.

Neutral protectionOn three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible.On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-positionswitch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 In (4P 3d + N/2) orneutral protection at In (4P 4d).

IndicationsOverload indication by alarm LED on the front; the LED goes on when the currentexceeds the long-time trip threshold.


Micrologic 2.0 and 5.0 control unitsfor protection of power circuits.Micrologic 5.0 provides in addition,time discrimination for short circuits.

Micrologic 5.0

.4.5.6

.7.8

.9.95.98

1

delay

short timeI itsd

(s)

on I 2t

.2

.3.4 .4

.1

.2.3

.10

off

instantaneous

long timealarmIr

x In

5

21

6

.512

48

121620

tr(s)

@ 6 Ir24

settingx Ir

2

2.53

45

68

10

Isd

1.5x In

test

3

2

410

3

6 8

1215

off

4

Note.Micrologic control units that do not include measurementfunctions are equipped with a transparent lead-seal cover asstandard.

31

2

Protection Micrologic 2.0Long time

Current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plugTime delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30% tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600

accuracy 0 to -20% tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24accuracy 0 to -20% tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6

Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping

InstantaneousPick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10accuracy ± 10%Time delay fixed: 20 ms

Protection Micrologic 5.0Long time

Current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plugTime delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30% tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600

accuracy 0 to -20% tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24accuracy 0 to -20% tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6

Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping

Short timePick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10accuracy ± 10%Time delay (ms) at 10 x Ir settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

I2t On 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4tsd (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350tsd (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500

InstantaneousPick-up (A) Ii = In x … 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 offaccuracy ± 10%

0 I

tIr

tr

Isd

32


2 Micrologic 6.0 A

40

100 %

%

menu

.4.5.6

.7.8

.9.95.98

1

delay

short timeI itsd

(s)

on I2 t

.2

.3.4 .4

.1

.2.3

.10off

instantaneous

long timealarmIr

x In

13

10

ground fault

BCD E F

GH

J

Ig tg(s)

on I2 t

.2.3

.4 .4

.1

.2.3

.10

offA

.512

48

1216

20

tr(s)

@ 6 Ir24

setting

x Ir

2

2.53

456

810

Isd

1.5x In

test6

3

5

71

2

12

11

9

8

2

410

3

6 8

1215

off

4

kAs

Ir=Ii=

tr=Isd=

Ig=

tsd=∆ t=

tg=

I∆n= MAX

Protection of distribution systemsMicrologic A control unitsfor Compact NS630b to 3200 (cont.)

1 long-time threshold and tripping delay2 overload alarm (LED)3 short-time pick-up and tripping delay4 instantaneous pick-up5 earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay6 earth-leakage or earth-fault test button7 long-time rating plug screw8 test connector9 lamp test, reset and battery test10 indication of tripping cause11 digital display12 three-phase bargraph and ammeter13 navigation buttons

Micrologic A control units protect powercircuits. They also offer measurements,display, communication and currentmaximeters. Version 6 provides earth-faultprotection, version 7 provides earth-leakage protection.

Note.Micrologic A control units come with a transparent lead-sealcover as standard.

ProtectionProtection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials.The selected values are momentarily displayed on the screen, in amperes and inseconds.Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a differentlong-time rating plug.

Overload protectionTrue rms long-time protection.Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping.

Short-circuit protectionShort-time (rms) and instantaneous protection.Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay.

Earth-fault protectionResidual or source ground return earth fault protection.Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for delay.

Residual earth-leakage protection (Vigi).Operation without an external power supply.c Protected against nuisance tripping.c DC-component withstand class A up to 10 A.

Neutral protectionOn three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible.On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-positionswitch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 In (4P 3d + N/2),neutral protection at In (4P 4d).

Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)A ZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of control units toprovide total discrimination for short-time and earth-fault protection, without a delaybefore tripping.

Overload alarmA red alarm LED goes on when the current exceeds the long-time trip threshold.

"Ammeter" measurementsMicrologic A control units measure the true (rms) value of currents.A digital LCD screen continuously displays the most heavily loaded phase (Imax) ordisplays the I1, I2, I3, IN, Ig,I∆n, stored-current (maximeter) and setting values bysuccessively pressing the navigation button. The load on each phase is indicatedcontinuously by bargraphs.The optional external power supply makes it possible to display currents < 20% In.

Communication optionIn conjunction with the COM communication option, the control unit transmits thefollowing:c Settingsc All “ammeter” measurementsc Tripping causesc Maximeter readings.

Fault indicationsLEDs indicate the type of fault:c Overload (long-time protection) or abnormal internal temperature (Ir)c Short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (Isd)c Earth fault or earth leakage (Ig or I∆n)c M icroprocessor malfunction (Ap).

Battery powerThe fault indication LEDs remain on until the test/reset button is pressed. Undernormal operating conditions, the battery supplying the LEDs has a service life ofapproximately 10 years.

TestA mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on thefront to check circuit-breaker operation. For Micrologic 6.0 A and 7.0 A control units,the operation of earth-fault or earth-leakage protection can be checked by pressingthe test button located above the test connector.

33

2

0 I

t I∆n

t∆n

0 I

t

Ig

tgI2t off

I2t on

Ir

tr

Isd

Ii

0 I

t

tsd

0 I

tIr

tr

Isd

Protection Micrologic 2.0 Along time

current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plugtime delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30% tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600

accuracy 0 to -20 % tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24accuracy 0 to -20 % tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6

thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping

instantaneouspick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10accuracy: ±10 %time delay fixed: 20 ms

Ammeter Micrologic 2.0 Acontinuous current measurements

measurements from 20 to 200 % of In I1 I2 I3 INaccuracy: 1.5% (including sensors) no auxiliary source (where I > 20 % In)maximeters I1 max I2 max I3 max IN max

Protection Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 Along time Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A

current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plugtime delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30 % tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600

accuracy 0 to -20 % tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24accuracy 0 to -20 % tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6

thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping

short timepick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10accuracy: ±10 %time delay (ms) at 10 Ir settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

I2t On 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4tsd (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350tsd (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500

instantaneouspick-up (A) Ii = In x … 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 offaccuracy: ±10 %

earth fault Micrologic 6.0 Apick up (A) Ig = In x … A B C D E F G H Jaccuracy: ±10 % In i 400 A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1

400 A < In i 1200 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1In > 1200 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200

time delay (ms) settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4at In or 1200 A I2t On 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

tg (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350tg (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500

residual earth leakage (Vigi) Micrologic 7.0 Asensitivity (A) I n 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30accuracy: 0 to -20 %time delay (ms.) settings 60 140 230 350 800

t n (max resettable time) 80 140 230 350 800t n (max break time) 140 200 320 500 1000

Ammeter Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 Acontinuous current measurements

measurements from 20 to 200 % of In I1 I2 I3 IN Ig I∆n

accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) no auxiliary source (where I > 20 % In)maximeters I1 max I2 max I3 max IN max Ig max I∆n max

Note.All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source.The test / reset button resets maximeters, clears the tripping indication and tests the battery.

menu

menu

34


2

Protection of distribution systemsMicrologic A control unitsfor Compact NS630b to 3200 (cont.)

External sensor (CT)

External sensor for sourceground return protection

Accessories for Micrologic control units

External sensorsExternal sensor for earth-fault protectionThe sensor is used with 3P circuit breakers and the Micrologic 6.0 A control unit.It is installed on the neutral conductor for residual type earth-fault protection.The rating of the sensor (CT) must be compatible with the rating of the circuitbreaker:c NS630b to NS1600 - 400/1600 CTc NS1600b to NS2000 - 400/2000 CTc NS2000 to NS3200 - 1000/3200 CT.

Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protectionThe sensor is installed around the busbars (phases + neutral) to detect thezero-phase sequence current required for the earth-leakage protection withMicrologic 7.0 A control unit.Rectangular sensors are available in two sizes.Inside dimensions (mm)c 280 x 115 up to 1600 Ac 470 x 160 up to 3200 A.

External sensor for source ground return protectionThe sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral point toearth and connects to the Micrologic 6.0 control unit to provide the source groundreturn (SGR) protection.

External voltage measurement inputsExternal voltage measurement inputs are used to supply power for earth leakageprotection.As standard, the Micrologic 7.0 control unit is supplied by internal voltagemeasurement inputs placed downstream of the pole for voltages between 100 and690 V AC.On request, external voltage measurement inputs may be ordered for circuitbreakers fed from the load side or for voltages exceeding 690 V.

Long-time rating plugFour interchangeable plugs may be used to limit the long-time threshold settingrange for higher accuracy.As standard, control units are equipped with the 0.4 to 1 plug.

Setting rangesStandard Ir = In x… 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1Low-setting option Ir = In x… 0.4 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.8High-setting option Ir = In x… 0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.90 0.92 0.95 0.98 1Off plug no long-time protection

External power-supply moduleUsed in conjunction with the Micrologic A control units, this module maintains threefunctions when the circuit breaker is OFF or the current is less than 20% In:c Display of measurementsc Screen backlightingc Operation of maximeters.

Characteristics:c Power supply:c 110/130, 200/240, 380/415 V AC (+ 10% - 15%), consumption 10 VAc 24/30, 48/60, 100/125 V DC (+20% -20%), consumption 10 W

c Output voltage: 24 V DC; power delivered: 5 W / 5 VA

c Ripple < 5%

c Class 2 isolation.

35

2

Spare parts for Micrologic control units

Lead-seal cover for Micrologic AA transparent, lead-seal cover controls access to the adjustment dials.When the cover is closed, it is still possible to access:c The test connectorc The test button for the earth-fault and earth-leakage protection function.

Spare batteryA battery supplies power to the LEDs identifying the tripping causes. Batteryservice life is approximately ten years.A test button on the front of the control unit is used to check the battery condition.The battery may be replaced on site when discharged.

Lead-seal cover forMicrologic A

36


2

Protection of distribution systemsSingle-phase and two-phasesystems

Compact NS160H single-pole

Compact NS100N two-pole




withdrawable front connectionrear connection

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2Rated current (A) In 40 °CRated insulation voltage (V) UiRated impulse withstand voltage kV) UimpRated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz

DCType of circuit breakerUltimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220 V

50/60 Hz 277 V380/415 V440 V500 V525 V660/690 V

DC 250 V (1P)500 V (2P)

Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs % IcuSuitability for isolationUtilisation categoryEndurance (C-O cycles) mechanical


Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1Breaking capacity (kA) 240 VV AC 50/60 Hz 277 V

480 V600 V

Protection and measurementsType of trip unitsRatings InOverload protection (thermal) long time Ir

thresholdShort-circuit protection (magnetic) instantaneous lm

pickupAdd-on earth-leakage protection add-on Vigi module

combination with Vigirex relay

Additional indication and control auxiliariesIndication contactsVoltages releases MX shunt release


Remote communication by busDevice status indication via communicating auxiliary contacts



Dimensions (mm) W x H x DWeight (kg)

Source changeover systemInterlocking systems

37

2

NS100 NS160 NS2501 2 1 2 1c c c c c- - - - -- - - - -c c c c cc c c c c- - - - -

- - - - -

100 100 160 160 250750 750 750 750 7508 8 8 8 8277 690 277 690 277250 500 250 500 250N H N H N H N H N25 40 85 100 25 40 85 100 2525 40 - - 25 40 - - 25- - 25 70 - - 36 70 -- - 25 65 - - 35 65 -- - 18 50 - - 30 50 -- - 18 35 - - 22 35 -- - 8 10 - - 8 10 -25 40 50 85 25 40 50 85 25- - 50 85 - - 50 85 -100% 100% 100% 100% 100%c c c c cA A A A A20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 10 00020 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 10 00010 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 5 000

N H N H N H N H N25 40 85 100 25 40 85 100 2525 40 - - 25 40 - - 25- - 25 65 - - 25 65 -- - 10 35 - - 10 35 -

built-in thermal-magnetic built-in thermal-magnetic built-in thermal-magnetic16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250fixed fixed fixed16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250fixed fixed fixed190 300 300 300 500 500 500 640 800 1000 1250 850 850 850- - -c c c

- c - c -- c - c -- c - c -

- c - c -

c c c c cc c c c cc c c c c35 x 161 x 86 70 x 161 x 86 35 x 161 x 86 70 x 161 x 86 35 x 161 x 860.7 1.2 0.7 1.2 0.7

- - - - -

38


2

Compact circuit breakersNumber of polesRating of sensors (A)Control manual toggle





Electrical characteristicsRated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 HzUltimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 1000 VService breaking capacity lcs % Icu

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2Rated current (A) In 40 °CRated insulation voltage (V) UiRated impulse withstand voltage kV) UimpRated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 HzUltimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 1000 VService breaking capacity lcs % IcuSuitability for isolationShort-time withstand current (kA rms) lcw 0.5 sV AC 50/60 Hz 1 sUtilisation categoryEndurance (C-O cycles) mechanical


Pollution degree

Protection and measurementsInterchangeable trip unitsOverload protection long time Ir (In x …)Short-circuit protection short time Isd (Ir x …)

instantaneous Ii (In x …)Earth-fault protection lg (In x …)Residual earth-leakage protection I nZone selective interlocking ZSIProtection of the fourth poleAdd-on earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relayCurrent measurements






Dimensions (mm) fixed 3PW x H x D 4PWeight (kg) fixed 3P

4P

Source changeover systemInterlocking systems

Protection of distribution systems1000 V systems

1000 V Compact NS400

For ratings above 400A,see the Masterpactcatalogue.

39

2

NS400 1000V For ratings above 400 A, see the Compact C and Masterpact catalogues3150, 250, 400ccccconsult usconsult usconsult usconsult usconsult us

115010100%

150, 250, 40012508100010100%cstandardisedstandardisedA1500040002000III

STR23SPccc-c--c-

ccc

cc---

ccc480 x 140 x 110-13-

consult us

40


2

Protection of distribution systems400 Hz applications

Tripping thresholdsThe 400 Hz current settings are obtained by multiplying the 50 Hz values by thefollowing coefficient: K1 for thermal trip units; K2 for magnetic trip units.On adjustable trip units, these adaptation coefficients are independent of the unitadjustment knob position.

Thermal trip unitsThe current settings are lower at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K1 < 1).

Magnetic trip unitsThe current settings are conversely higher at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K2 > 1).Adjustable trip units should be set to minimum, or use Compact circuit breakersequipped with low magnetic trip units(type G).

Electronic trip unitsThe use of electronics offers the advantage of greater operating stability when thefrequency is varied. However, the devices are still subjected to frequency relatedtemperature effects which may sometimes pose restrictions on their use.Column K1 of the table gives the maximum permissible current to be used for thecurrent setting (knob position).

Thermal-magnetic trip units

circuit breaker trip unit thermal setting K1 magnetic K2at 40 °C setting

NS100N TM16G 16 0.95 63 1.6TM25G 25 0.95 80 1.6TM40G 40 0.95 80 1.6TM63G 63 0.95 125 1.6

NS250N TM16D 16 0.95 240 1.6TM25D 25 0.95 300 1.6TM40D 40 0.95 500 1.6TM63D 63 0.95 500 1.6TM80D 80 0.9 650 1.6TM100D 100 0.9 800 1.6TM125D 125 0.9 1000 1.6TM160D 160 0.9 1250 1.6TM200D 200 0.9 1000 (*) 1.6TM250D 250 0.9 1250 (*) 1.6

(*) for TM 200D and TM250D, Im must be set to its maximum

Electronic trip units

Compact adaptation coefficientscircuit breaker trip unit rating long-time short-time K2

Ir at 50 Hz Ir maxi Irm at 50 Hz(A at 40 °C) K1 (A)

NS100N STR22SE 40...100 0.4 to 1 2 to 10 Ir 1NS250N STR22SE 100...250 0.4 to 0.9 2 to 10 Ir 1NS400N STR23SE 400 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1NS630N STR23SE 630 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1NS400N STR53SE 400 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1NS630N STR53SE 630 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1C801N STR25DE 800 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97

STR35SE/GE 800 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97C1001N STR25DE 1000 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97

STR35SE/GE 1000 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97C1251N STR25DE 1250 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97

STR35SE/GE 1250 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97

41

2

Breaking capacity of Compact NS andCompact circuit breakers at 400 Hz

At 440 V, 400 Hzcircuit breaker breaking capacity

NS100N 12 kANS250N 4,5 kANS400N 10 kANS630N 10 kAC801N 25 kAC1001N 25 kAC1251N 25 kA

MN or MX auxiliary releasesFor Compact NS100-630For circuit breakers on 400 Hz systems, only 125 V DC rated releases can beused. The release must be supplied by the 400 Hz system via a rectifier bridge (tobe selected from the table below) and an additional resistor with characteristicsdepending on the system voltage and the type of circuit breaker.

U (V) 400 Hz rectifier additional resistor220/240 V Thomson 110 BHz or 4.2 kΩ-5 W

General Instrument W06 orSemikron SKB at 1,2/1,3

380/420 V Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3 10.7 kΩ-10 W

Note : other models of rectifier bridges can be used if their characteristics are at leastequivalent to those stated above.

For Compact C801-1251The following auxiliary releases are designed to operate at 400 Hz.

U (V) 400 Hz catalogue numberMN 110/130 V 44925MN 208/250 V 44926MN 380/415 V 44932MX 380/415 V 44914

R

MN/MX

125 V CC

400 Hz

U volt

Connection

42


2

Protection of distribution systemsCircuit breaker selection for DCapplications

Selection criteriaThe selection of the type of circuit breaker most suitable for protection of aDC installation depends mainly on the following criteria: The rated current, which determines the rating of the equipment; The rated voltage, which determines the number of poles in series necessary

for breaking; The maximum short-circuit current at the point of installation, which determines

the breaking capacity; The type of network (see below).

+

–U

B A

C

i

R

a

b

+

–

U/2+

U/2 B A

C

ia

b

R+

–U

B A

C

i

R

a

b

Isc

240 V DC300 A500 AhRi = 0.5 m /cell

Calculation the short-circuit current (Isc) across the terminals of a batteryWhen a short-circuit occurs across its terminals, a battery discharges a currentgiven by Ohm's law:

Isc = VbRi

where Vb = the maximum discharge voltage (battery 100 % charged).and Ri = the internal resistance equivalent to the sum of the cell resistances (figuregenerally given by the manufacturer according to the capacity of the battery).

ExampleWhat is the short-circuit current at the terminals of a standing battery with thefollowing characteristics:

Capacity: 500 Ah;Max. discharge voltage: 240 V(110 cells of 2.2 V);Discharge current: 300 A;Autonomy: 1/2 hour;Internal resistance: 0.5 mΩ per cell.

Ri = 110 x 0.5 10-3 = 55 10-3

Isc = 2405 5 1 0−3 = 4.4kA

As the above calculation shows, the short-circuit current is relatively weak.

Note: If the internal resistance is not known, the following approximate formula can be used:Isc = kC, where C is the capacity of the battery expressed in Ampere-hours, and k is acoefficient close to 10 but in any case always lower than 20.

type of system earthed systems insulated systemsone polarity of the DC supply is a centre point of the DC supply isearthed earthed

diagramsand variouscases of faults

fault effect fault A max. Isc Isc close to max. Isc no effectthe positive polarity the positive polarity is the onlyis the only one involved one involved, voltage U/2

fault B max. Isc max. Isc max. Iscboth polarities are involved both polarities are involved both polarities are involved

fault C no effect same as fault A but this is the no effectnegative polarity which is involved

most unfavorable case fault A faults A and C fault Bdistribution of the the poles required to perform on each polarity there must be the the poles required to performbreaking poles the break are in series number of poles required to perform the break are shared between

on the positive polarity the break of max. Isc at U/2 the 2 polarities

43

2

Example 1Determine the protection required for a 80 A feeder on a 125 V DC network with anearthed negative pole and an Isc of 15 kA.The table below indicates that a NC100H circuit breaker (30 kA, 2P, 125 V) shouldbe used.The table opposite indicates that both circuit breaker poles should be fitted on thepositive pole of the network.An additional circuit breaker pole can be fitted on the negative pole of the networkfor isolation purposes.

Example 2Determine the protection required for a 100 A feeder on a 250 V DC network withan earthed middle point and an Isc of 15 kA.Each pole will be exposed to a maximum of U/2 = 125 V.The table below indicates that NC100H (30 kA, 2P, 125 V), NS100N (50 kA, 1P,125 V) or NS160N (50 kA, 1P, 125 V) circuit breakers should be used.The table opposite indicates that both circuit breaker poles must take part in thebreaking at a voltage of 125 V.

Example 3Determine the protection required for a 400 A feeder on an unearthed 250 V DCnetwork with an Isc of 35 kA.The table above indicates that NS400H circuit breakers (85 kA, 1P, 250 V) shouldbe used. At least 2 poles must take part in breaking.The table opposite indicates that the half the number of circuit breaker polesrequired for breaking should be fitted on the positive pole of the network and theother half on the negative pole.

selection table of DC circuit breakers

NC100 H4P100 A

250 V =+

-

load

NC100 H3P80 A

125 V =+

-

load

type rated current (A) breaking capacity (kA) (L/R i 0.015 s) protection against protection againstand (and number of poles required to perform the break) overloads (thermal) short-circuits (magnetic)trip units 24/48 V 125 V 250 V 500 V 750 V

NS100N 16-25-40-63-80-100 50(1p) 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (2p) same as for trip unitsNS100H 16-25-40-63-80-100 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (2p) used on AC systemsNS100L 16-25-40-63-80-100 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (2p)NS160N 80-100-125-160 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (2p)NS160H 80-100-125-160 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (2p)NS160L 80-100-125-160 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (2p)NS250N 160-200-250 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (2p)NS250H 160-200-250 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (2p)NS250L 160-200-250 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (2p)NS400H MP1/MP2/MP3 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (2p) no thermal protection: specially designed for DCNS630H MP1/MP2/MP3 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (2p) an external relayC1251N-DC P21/P41-1250 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (2p) 50 (3p) 25 (3p) must be provided

NS400H2P400 A

250 V =+

-

load

44


2

Motor protection up to 37 kWMotor rating (kW) 0.37 … 37

Compact NS80

Breaking H 70capacity (kA rms)380/415 V

General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16The Compact NS80H-MA circuit breaker is specially designed for motor protection.

Accompanying trip unit Page 46A built-in MA magnetic trip unit provides short-circuit protection.

Motor protection up to 250 kWMotor rating (kW) 1.1 … 110 18.5…250

Compact NS100 NS160/250 NS400/630

Breaking N 25 36 45capacity (kA rms) H 70 70 70380/415 V L 150 150 150

General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers for motor protection are the same as those fordistribution systems, but are fitted with specific motor trip units.

Accompanying trip units Page 49 to 51MA magnetic trip units provide short-circuit protection. Interchangeable ME electronic trip unitsprovide protection against short-circuits, overloads and phase imbalance.

Motor protection up to 750 kWMotor rating (kW) 160…750


Breaking N 50capacity (kA rms) H 70380/415 V L 150

General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control unitsare the same as those for distribution systems.

Accompanying control units Page 30Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to 1600 circuitbreakers.Micrologic 2.0 A and 5.0 A electronic control units provide protection against short-circuits andoverloads. Micrologic 7.0 A provides the same protection functions, plus earth-leakageprotection.

Motor protectionOverview of solutions

The circuit breakers presented hereprovide protection against short circuitsand are suitable for isolation as definedby standard IEC 60947-2.For complete protection of the motor andits control device, overload protection maybe provided by either the circuit breaker ora separate Telemecanique thermal relay.The control device may be of the directon-line type (with or without reversing)or of the “star-delta” type.Combinations are governed by standardIEC 60947-4.1.

Protection coordination (as defined by IEC60947-4)Whatever the power of the motor, the coordinationbetween the circuit breaker, contactor and relaycan be of either type 1 or 2.Selection depends on operational requirementsconcerning continuity of service and the technicalskills of servicing personnel.All type 2 Merlin Gerin/Telemecanique combinationshave been tested under the conditions defined bystandards and they are certified ASEFA/LOVAG.

45

2

P (kW) (400 V, 50 Hz)Ir (A)

CompactNS100 … NS250

CompactNS80H-MA


MA

MA

STR22ME

0.371.5

18.540

5.512 50

3780 100 160 200

110220

160320

250500 800

5601000

7501350

1.12.5

CompactNS630b … NS1600 Micrologic 2.0 A / 5.0 A / 7.0 A

STR43ME

MA

Selection of a trip unit or Micrologic control unit

46


2

Motor protectionCompact NS80H-MA

Compact NS80 H-MA

This circuit breaker is specially designed forthe protection of motors rated up to 37 kW:c Due to its high current-limiting

capacity, it effectively protects motorstarters (type-2 coordination as perIEC 60947-4, with contactors)

c Small size for easy installation inmotor control centre (MCC)switchboards.

Compact circuit breakers NS80 H-MANumber of poles 3Control manual (toggle, c

direct or extended rotary handle) celectric -

Connections fixed front connection crear connection -

withdrawable front connection -rear connection -

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2Rated current (A) In 65 °C 80Rated insulation Ui 750voltage (V)Rated impulse Uimp 8withstand voltage (kV)Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690Ultimate breaking Icu AC 50/60 Hz 220 / 240 V 100capacity (kA rms) 380 / 415 V 70

440 V 65500V 25525V 25660/690V 6

Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 100%Utilisation category ASuitability for isolation cEndurance (C-O cycles) mechanical 20 000

electrical 440 V In/2 10 000In 7 000

Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V 100

480 V 65600 V 10

ProtectionMagnetic trip unit built-inRating In 1.5 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 80Instantaneous short-circuit lm adjustable pick-upprotection 6 … 14 x InEarth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay

Indication and control auxiliariesIndication contacts 1 OF + 1 SDVoltage releases MN or MX

Installation and connectionsConnections Built-in terminalsTerminal extensions and spreaders -Terminal shields cInterphase barriers -DIN rail plate cDimensions (mm) W x H x D 90 x 120 x 80Weight (kg) 1.0

47

2

Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers,equipped with an MA magnetic trip unit withadjustable thresholds, offer:c Short-circuit protectionc Suitability for isolation.Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakersand the trip unit are supplied alreadyassembled.

General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16

MA trip unitsRating (A) at 65°C In 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 100 150 220 320 500Compact N/H/L NS100 c c c c c c - - - -circuit breaker NS160 - - - c c c c - - -

NS250 - - - - - c c c - -H/L NS400 - - - - - - - - c -

NS630 - - - - - - - - - cShort-circuit protection (magnetic)

Pick-up Im setting setting setting6...14 x In 9...14 x In 9...14 x In

Compact NS250H

Compact NS400H-MA

Compact NS100 to 630 circuitbreakers with MA magnetic trip units

48


2

Motor protectionCompact NS100 to 250circuit breakers with STR22MEelectronic trip unit

Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakersSee the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page 20.

STR22ME electronic trip unit

ProtectionOverload protectionLT (long time) protection with adjustable Ir threshold, in compliance with trippingclass 10 as defined by IEC 60947-4.

Short-circuit protectionShort-time and instantaneous protection:c Short-time protection with fixed pick-up (Im = 13 x Ir) and tripping delayc Instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up (15 x In).

Phase-imbalance protectionThis function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC 60947-4.1 and trips thecircuit breaker whenever a phase-current imbalance of 40 % or more occurs. Thecircuit-breaker opening time is between 3.5 and 6 seconds.

Overload LED (%Ir)A LED on the front indicates the percent load:c OFF: I < 1.05 Irc Flashing: I u 1.05 Ir


Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module(Early-break thermal-fault signal)This module opens the contactor if an overload occurs, thus making it possible to:c Differentiate between tripping due to overloads and short-circuitsc Improve continuity of service (no manual reset following tripping due to an

overload).This module can also be used to signal a thermal fault.

Characteristicsc Manual reset (local or remote).c Compatible with the following control voltages:v 24 to 72 V DC and 24 to 48 V ACv 110 to 240 V AC / DC.c Replaces the MN and MX voltage releases.

Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers,equipped with an STR22ME electronic tripunit with adjustable thresholds, offer:c Short-circuit protectionc Phase-imbalance protectionc Overload protectionc Suitability for isolation.

Compact NS250 equipped with an STR22ME electronic trip unit

49

2

Ir ImIn=50A

IEC 947.4 / cl.10

Ir 13 Ir

7,2Ir

7,0s

Ir 1,05 Ir

testA30 50

31.5 47.5

33.5 45

37.5 4035.5 42.5

STR 22 ME

1 7 6

STR22ME trip unitRatings (A) 20 to 70 °C 20…100 150 220

NS100N/H/L c - -NS160N/H/L c c -NS250N/H/L c c c

Overload protection (Long Time)Current setting Ir adjustable, 10 settings

0.6...1 x InTripping class 10(IEC 60947-4)Time delay (s) fixed(min…max.) at 1.5 x Ir 120…320

at 6 x Ir 6…15at 7.2 Ir 4…10

Motor-overload indication LED

Phase-imbalance protection in compliance with IEC 60947-4.1Tripping threshold u 40% imbalanceTime delay 3.5 to 6 seconds

Short-circuit protection (Short Time)Pick-up Isd fixed

13 x IrAccuracy ± 20 %Max. resettable time (ms) fixed

10Max. break time 60

Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous)Pick-up Ii fixed

15 x In

OptionsSDTAM module c

Overload protection settings (A)rating (A) thresholds (A)20 12 12.6 13.4 14.2 15 16 17 18 19 2025 15 15.7 16.7 17.7 18.7 20 21.2 22.5 23.7 2540 24 25.5 27 28.5 30 32 34 36 38 4050 30 31.5 33.5 35.5 37.5 40 42.5 45 47.5 5080 48 51 54 57 60 64 68 72 76 80100 60 63 67 71 75 80 85 90 95 100150 90 95 101 107 113 120 127 135 142 150220 132 140 148 157 166 177 187 198 209 220

1 long-time threshold2 tripping class 10 as defined by IEC 60947-43 short-time pick-up4 short-time tripping delay5 instantaneous pick-up6 test connector7 percent load indication

t

0 Ir 13Ir I

1

2

34

5

50


2

Motor protectionCompact NS400 to 630circuit breakers with STR43MEelectronic trip unit

Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers,equipped with an STR43ME electronic tripunit with adjustable thresholds, offer:c Short-circuit protectionc Phase-imbalance protectionc Overload protectionc Suitability for isolation.

Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakersSee the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page 20.

STR43ME electronic trip unit

ProtectionOverload protectionTrue (rms) long-time protection with an adjustable threshold:c Io base setting (5 settings from 0.5 to 0.8) and Ir fine adjustment

(8 settings from 0.8 to 1)c Adjustable tripping delay, in compliance with tripping classes 10A, 10 and 20

as defined by IEC 60947-4.

The STR43ME offers two motor-cooling time constants, associated with the motorstarting class:c Short cooling time constant (the same as the heating time constant), providing

maximum continuity of service and satisfactory motor protectionc Long cooling time constant (four times the heating time constant), providing

maximum motor protection.

Short-circuit protectionShort-time and instantaneous protection:c Short-time protection with adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delayc Instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up.

Phase-imbalance protectionThis function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC 60947-4.1 and tripsthe circuit breaker whenever a phase-current imbalance of 40% or more occurs.The circuit-breaker opening time is 4 seconds ±10%.

Indications: Overload LED (%Ir)A LED on the front indicates the percent load:c OFF: I < 1.05 Irc Flashing: I u 1.05 Ir

Fault indicationsLEDs indicate the type of fault that caused tripping:c Overload (long-time protection) or abnormal component temperature (> Ir)c Short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (> Isd)c Phase imbalance (LED on the right)c Microprocessor malfunction:v All four (% Ir), (> Ir), (> Isd) and (phase imbalance) LEDs ON.

Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. When a faultoccurs, the LED indicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately tenminutes to conserve battery power. The information is however stored in memoryand the LED can be turned back ON by pressing the battery/LED test pushbutton.The LED automatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuitbreaker is reset.

TestA mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on thefront to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.The test pushbutton tests the battery and the LEDs.

Self monitoringThe circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature isdetected.

OptionsThree options are available:c Ammeter (I)c Contactor tripping module (SDTAM)c Communication (COM).

Compact NS630 equipped with an STR43ME electronic trip unit

51

2> Ih

> Im

> Ir

µ P

faulttestSTR 43 ME

Io

x In

-test

+

31

.90.93 .95

.98

1

.88

.85

.8

9 1011

12

13

8

7

6x Io

Ir Isd

x Ir

%Ir >Ir >Isd

A

Ir I1 I2 I3 IsdIr li

tr

tsd

class

6 7

.71 .8.63

.56

.5 .8

2010

10A

2010

10A

tr

2

IEC 947-4-1

0 Ir Isd Ii I

12

34

5

t

1 long-time threshold2 tripping class3 short-time pick-up4 short-time tripping delay5 instantaneous pick-up6 test connector7 percent load indication

Possiblecombinations:c Ic I + COMc SDTAMc SDTAM + Ic SDTAM + I + COM

STR43ME trip unitRatings (A) 20 to 70 °C 120 200 320 500Circuit NS400N/H/L c c c -breakers NS630N/H/L - - - cOverload protection (Long Time)

Current setting Ir adjustable, 40 settings - 0.4...0.8 x InTripping class 10A, 10, 20(IEC 60947-4)Time delay (s) adjustable(min. ... max.) at 1.5 x Ir 144…198 270…357 433…595

at 6 x Ir 5.8…7.3 10.9…13.1 17.4…21.8at 7.2 Ir 4…5 7.3…9.1 12…15

Phase-imbalance protection in compliance with IEC 60947-4.1Tripping threshold u 40% imbalanceTime delay 4 s ± 10 %

Short-circuit protection (Short Time)Pick-up Isd adjustable, 8 settings - 6...13 x IrAccuracy ± 15 %Time delay (ms) fixed

max. resettable time 10max. break time 60

Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous)Pick-up Ii fixed - 13 x Ir max.

Other functionsMotor-overload LED cIndications module cOptions

Ammeter (I) cSDTAM module cCommunication (COM) c

Options for STR43ME trip unit

Ammeter (I)A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatestload. The value of each current I1, I2, I3 and the long-time current setting Ir may besuccessively displayed by pressing a scroll button.LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed.

Ammeter display limitsc Minimum current u 0.2 x In. Lower currents are not displayed.c Maximum current i 10 x In.

Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module(Early-break thermal-fault signal)See the information on this optional module on page 44.

Communication (COM)This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules.Transmitted data:c Settings;c Phase currents (rms values);c Highest current of the three phases;c Overload-condition alarm;c Cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.).


52

2

Protection of industrialcontrol panelsOverview of solutions

Compact NSC100 ( UL 508 / IEC 60947-2 / CSA22-2)

Rated current (A) 12.5…100

Breaking N 18capacity (kA rms)380/480 V

General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16Compact NSC100 circuit breakers are specially designed to protect industrial control panels.

Accompanying trip unit Page 52The built-in TMD thermal-magnetic trip unit provides:c overload protection (adjustable-threshold thermal device)c short-circuit protection (fixed-pick-up magnetic device).

Compact NS100 to 630 ( UL 508 / IEC 60947-2 / CSA22-2)

Rated current (A) 12.5 … 12.5 ... 12.5 ... 60... 250...100 160 250 400 630

Compact NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630

Breaking N 25 35 35 42 42capacity (kA rms) H 65 65 65 65 65380/480 V

General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 18Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers are designed for protection of distribution systems andare also suitable for protection of industrial control panels.

Accompanying trip unit Page 24The trip units are interchangeable.Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers are equipped with TMD thermal-magnetic or STRelectronic trip units.Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers are equipped exclusively with STR electronic trip units.

Compact NS circuit breakers arespecially designed to protect incomingfeeders and groups of outgoing circuitson industrial control panels:c Compliance with standards applicable

worldwide including IEC 60947-2and UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14

c Overload and short-circuit protectionc Isolation with positive contact

indication, making it possible toservice machines safely by isolatingthem from all power sources

c Installation in universal and functionaltype enclosures

c NA switch-disconnector version.

53

2

Circuit breaker NSC100N

Compact NSC100N

Compact NS100N circuit breakers arespecially designed to protect incomingfeeders and groups of outgoing circuits onindustrial control panels.

Compact circuit breaker NSC100NNumber of poles 3Control manual (toggle, c

direct or extended rotary handle) celectric -

Connections fixed front connection crear connection -

withfront connection -drawable rear connection -

Mounting on DIN rail cElectrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2

Rated current (A) In 40 °C 100Rated insulation Ui 750voltage (V)Rated impulse Uimp 8withstand voltage (kV)Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690

DC 250Ultimate breaking capacity Icu AC 220/240 V 42(kA rms) 50/60 380/415 V 18

Hz 440 V 18500 V 10525 V 10

DC 125 V 5250 V (2 P) 5

Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 100%Utilisation category ASuitability for isolation cEndurance (C-O cycles) mechanical 20 000

electrical 440 V In/2 10 000In 7 000

Electrical characteristics as per UL 508Breaking capacity (kA) AC 50/60 Hz 240 V 42

480 V 18600 V 10

ProtectionBuilt-in thermal-magnetic trip unitRatings In 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 70 80 100Instantaneous short-circuit lm fixed pick-upprotection (A) 600 600 600 600 100010001000100010001250Add-on earth-leakage add-on Vigi moduleprotection combination with Vigirex relay

Indication and control auxiliariesAuxiliary contacts cEarly-make or early-break contact cVoltage releases MN or MX

Installation and connectionsConnection built-in terminalsAccessories terminal shields c

interphase barriers -escutcheons c

Dimensions (mm) 3 P 90 x 120 x 80W x H x D 4 P 120 x 120 x 80Weight (kg) 3 P 1.0

4 P 1.3


54

2

P (hp) (480 V, 3P)Ir (A)


CompactNSC100N


TMD

STR22ME

STR43ME / STR23SE / STR53UE

312

2032

1525

3040

3048

4063

5070

6080

75100

125160

150205

1016

150220

250320

400500

W D

H

Protection of industrialcontrol panelsTrip units, auxiliaries,installation enclosures

STR electronic trip units are designed for:c Short-circuit protectionc Overload protectionc Phase-failure protection (STR22ME and STR43ME).

TMD thermal-magnetic trip units are designed for:c Short-circuit protectionc Overload protection.

Type NA devices are switch-disconnectors which must always be protectedupstream in accordance with applicable installation standards.

Circuit breakers trip units UL/CSA approvalsNSC100N TMD “Manual Motor Controller:

NA Across the line starter &General use“

NS100/160/250 N/H STR22ME “Manual Motor Controller:NA Across the line starter”TMD “Manual Motor Controller:STR22SE/GE General Use”

NS400/630 N/H STR43ME “Manual Motor Controller:NA Across the Line Starter”STR23SESTR53UE

AuxiliariesAll auxiliaries can be added to the circuit breaker by the user:c Padlocking devices (in the OFF position);c Rotary handlec Status-indication auxiliary contacts (ON, OFF and tripped)c Shunt (MX) or undervoltage (MN) releasesc Early-make or early-break contacts.

Rotary handleAvailable in direct or extended versions for mounting up to 590 mm behind front.Versions include:c Black front with black handlec Yellow front with red handle (for machine tools or emergency off as per

IEC 204 / VDE 0013).

All rotary handles can be padlocked in the OFF position.Optional door interlock, recommended for MCC panels (motor control centres).

Early-make or early-break contactsThese auxiliary contacts make it possible to de-energise the downstream auxiliarycircuits of the control panel as well as the auxiliary circuits supplying the MNrelease, if applicable.

Installation in an enclosureCompact circuit breakers can be installed in a metal enclosure together with otherdevices (contactors, motor-protection circuit breakers, LEDs, etc.)

Minimum enclosure dimensionsCircuit breakers Height (mm) Depth (mm) Width (mm)

NSC100N 300 150 200NS100 N/H 457 130 208NS160 N/H 457 130 208NS250 N/H 457 130 208NS400 N/H - - -NS630 N/H - - -

Trip-unit selection

Installation enclosure

55

2

UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 marking

The UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 approval isfor a “Manual Motor Controller” (“across theline starter” or “general use”).The circuit breakers are 100% rated.

test

+ -IEC 947.4 / cl.10

A

Ir

198

209

148157

166 177187

140220132

Ir 13Ir

7,2 Ir

7,0 s

STR 22 MEIn=220A > 1,05 Ir

Vac115230460575

15505050

4075

200150

1ph3phhp

220A

100% rated

Trip-unit marking

NSC100 device marking(circuit breaker with built-in trip unit)

NS100 to 250 device marking(circuit breaker with interchangeable trip unit)

SC current rating kA 50/60 HzVac

240480600

tripping current 125% 100% rated

wire size

tightening torque

lb-inch Nm14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu

12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al130 11.3

LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL.34XL

NS100-160-250 N/H/NA

852510

856510

853510

856510

temperature rating

75°C

N H N HNS100 NS250

4 AWG to 2 AWG Cu,Al 180 20

1 AWG to 350 kcmil Cu,Al 230 26

Terminal kitreference

3P 4P

29242 29243

29259 29260

R

Equipped with TMD/DE or STR trip unitThis MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering

not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMCindicated here below, or the upstream protective device

interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by

any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation.

NS160

853518

856518

N H

UL / CSA logo

Cable cross-sectionand tightening torques

Breaking capacity

wire size

tightening torque

lb-inch Nm14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu

12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al50

temperature rating75°C

5.5

LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL.34XL

NSC100N-NA

Vac 115 230 460 575

ratings (A) hp

1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph

16

20253240

50637080

100

1

1.5223

355

7.510

2

355

7.510

1010

3

1010

15

1515

20

7.55

2

33

5

57.5101015202530

30

5

7.51010152025303040

1010

1520303040506075

7.5

10101520

2530

4050

40

10

1520303040606075100

R

tripping current 125% 100% rated

This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of deliveringnot more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMCindicated here below, or the upstream protective deviceinterrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected byany protective device for Group fusing or Group installation.SC current rating kA 50/60 HzVac

240480600

422510

UL / CSA logo

Cable cross-sectionand tightening torques

Breaking capacity

Horsepower rating


56

2

Circuit breakers equipped with an add-on Vigi module(Vigicompact)Rated current (A)

Vigicompact NS100 to 250 N/H/LNS400 and 630 N/H/L

General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 20Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers are presented in the “Protection of distributionsystems” section.

Accompanying Vigi modulesEarth-leakage protection is achieved by installing a Vigi module directly on the circuit-breakerterminals.

Circuit breakers equipped with a control unit offeringintegrated earth-leakage protection and an externalrectangular sensorRated current (A) 630… 3200

Compact NS630b to 1000 N/H/L NS1600b to 3200NS1250 and 1600 N/H

General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 22Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers are presented in the “Protection of distributionsystems” section.

Accompanying control units Page 30Micrologic 7.0 A electronic control units offer earth-leakage protection as standard.

Earth-leakage protection using a Vigirex relayVigirex Earth-leakage relay Separate toroids

Compact circuit breaker + Vigirex relay combinationVigirex relays may be used to add external earth-leakage protection to Compact NS circuitbreakers. The circuit breakers must be equipped with an MN or MX voltage release. Vigirexrelays are very useful when special time-delay or tripping-threshold values are required, or whenthere are major installation constraints (circuit breaker already installed and connected, limitedspace available, etc.).Vigirex-relay characteristics:c Sensitivity adjustable from 30 mA to 250 mA and eight time-delay settings (0 to 1 second)c Closed toroids (30 to 300 mm in diameter) or split toroids (46 to 110 mm in diameter).Options:c Trip alarm by a fail-safe contactc Pre-alarm LED and contact (threshold = 0.5 x I∆n)c 400 Hz distribution systems, etc.Compliance with standards:c IEC 60947-2, appendix Bc French decree dated 14 November 1988c IEC 60255-4 and IEC 60801-2 to 5 covering protection against nuisance tripping due to

transient overvoltages, lightning strikes, switching of devices on the distribution system,electrostatic discharges, radiofrequency interference.

c IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 mAc VDE 664, operation down to -25° C.

Earth-leakage protectionOverview of solutions

Earth-leakage protection is obtained by:c Fitting a Vigi module on the circuit

breaker (Compact NS100 to 630)c Installing a Micrologic 7.0 A control

unit (Compact NS630b to 3200)c Using a Vigirex relay and separate

toroids (all Compact circuit breakers).

Availability to be announced

57

2

1 sensitivity setting2 time-delay setting (for selective earth-fault protection)3 lead-seal fixture for controlled access to settings4 test button simulating an earth-fault for regular

checks on the tripping function5 reset button (reset required after earth-fault tripping)6 rating plate7 housing for SDV auxiliary contact

vigi

200 / 440 V - 50 / 60 Hz

246

135

T

NS 250

before dielectric testremove t h i s cove r

avant test diélectriqueenlever ce couvercle

N

310

150

600

0,03 ( ∆t = 0 )

vigi MH3

1

0,3

∆t(ms)

I∆n(A)

10

HS

T R

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Vigicompact NS250N

Plug-in circuit breakerThe Vigi module can be installed on a plug-in base.Special accessories are required (see the sectionon part numbers).

Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact)for Compact NS100 to 630

Vigicompact NS100 to 630 circuit breakerswith earth-leakage protectionAddition of the Vigi module does not alter circuit-breaker characteristics:c Compliance with standardsc Degree of protection, class II front-face isolationc Positive contact indicationc Electrical characteristicsc Trip-unit characteristicsc Installation and connection modesc Indication, measurement and control auxiliariesc Installation and connection accessories.Dimensions and weights NS100/160 NS250 NS400/630

Dimensions 3 poles 105 x 236 x 86 135 x 355 x 110W x H x D (mm) 4 poles 140 x 236 x 86 180 x 355 x 110Weight (kg) 3 poles 2.5 2.8 8.8

4 poles 3.2 3.4 10.8

Vigi earth-leakage protection moduleCompliance with standards:c IEC 60947-2, appendix Bc French decree dated 14 November 1988c IEC 60255-4 and IEC 60801-2 to 5 covering protection against nuisance

tripping due to transient overvoltages, lightning strikes, switching of devices onthe distribution system, electrostatic discharges, radiofrequency interference.

c IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 mAc VDE 664, operation down to -25° C.

Remote indicationsVigi modules may be equipped with an auxiliary contact (SDV) to remotely signaltripping due to an earth fault.

Power supplyVigi modules are self-supplied internally by the distribution-system voltage andtherefore do not require any external source. They continue to function even whensupplied by only two phases.

Vigi module selection tableVigi ME Vigi MH Vigi MB

Number of poles 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1)

NS100 N/H/L c c -NS160 N/H/L c c -NS250 N/H/L - c -NS400 N/H/L - - cNS630 N/H/L - - cProtection characteristics

Sensitivity fixed adjustable adjustableI n (A) 0.3 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 - 30Time delayIntentional fixed adjustable adjustabledelay (ms) < 40 0 60 (2) 150 (2) 310 (2) 0 60 150 310Max. breaking < 40 < 40 <140 <300 <800 < 40 < 140 < 300 < 800time (ms)Rated voltage 200...440 200... 440 - 440...550 200...440 - 440...550V AC 50/60 Hz

(1) Vigi 3P modules may also be used on 3P circuit breakers used for single-phase ortwo-phase protection.(2) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting.

58

Functionsand characteristics

2

Control and isolationOverview of solutions

Switch-disconnectors

MasterpactNW Masterpact

NW or Compact

MasterpactNW or Compact

M

400 A

160 A : 15 - 25 kA 400 A : 20 - 80 kA 160 A 15 - 25 kA

1000 A20 -80 kA15 -40 kA 1600 A

M

40 A 5 kA

MM

25 kA

630 A

10 kA

63 A

M

63 A 10 kA 5-15 kA

125 A

Main power distribution boardfor commercial applications

Main powerdistribution board forindustrial applications

Source couplingswitch-disconnector

Modular sub-distribution board

Industrialdistributionboard

Replacementsource

Localisolationenclosure

Final distributionenclosure forcommercialapplications

Localisolationenclosure Control panel

Localisolationenclosure

N.B. adjacent to or built into the machine

building utilities building finaldistribution

continuous processes manufacturing processesindividual machines

Automationcabinet

Source-changeoversystem

Circuit breaker-disconnector

Switch-disconnector

Masterpact

Compact NS Interpact IN

Compact NS Interpact INS Compact NS

Multi 9

Vario

NG125Interpact INS

standardised symbols

59

2

Compact switch-disconnectors are used tocontrol and isolate electrical distributioncircuits. In addition to these basic functions,other functions for safety, remote controland convenience include:c Earth-leakage protectionc Auxiliary MN/MX releasesc Remote operationc Ammeter, etc.Compact switch-disconnectors may beinterlocked with another Compactswitch-disconnector or circuit breaker toconstitute a source-changeover system.

Compact switch-disconnectorequipped with a Vigi earth-leakage module

Compact switch-disconnectorequipped with a motor mechanism

MN/MXvoltagerelease

Compact NS250 switch-disconnector

60


2

Control and disconnectionNS100NA to 630NAswitch-disconnectors

Compact NS100NA

Installation standards require upstreamprotection. However, due to their high-setmagnetic release, Compact NS100NA to630NA switch-disconnectors are selfprotected.

(1) 2P in 3P case(2) Suitable for 480 V NEMA

Compact switch-disconnectorsNumber of polesControl manual toggle





Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 °CRated insulation voltage (V) UiRated impulse withstand voltage (kV) UimpRated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz

DCRated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz

220/240 V380/415 V440/480 V (2)500/525 V660/690 V

DC250 V (1 P)500 V (2 P in series)

Short-circuit making capacity lcm (kA peak) minimum (switch-disconnector alone)maximum (with protectioncircuit breaker upstream)

Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 1 s3 s20 s

Suitability for isolationEndurance (C-O cycles) mechanical

electrical AC 690 V AC 22A440 V AC 23A

DC 250 V DC 23APositive contact indicationPollution degree

ProtectionAdd-on earth-leakage protection add-on Vigi module

combination with Vigirex relay


MN undervoltage releaseVoltage-presence indicatorCurrent-transformer moduleAmmeter moduleInsulation-monitoring module

Remote communication by busDevice status indications (communicating auxiliary contacts)Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism)



Dimensions (mm) fixed, front connection 2/3PW x H x D 4PWeight (kg) fixed, front connection 3P

4P

Source-changeover system (see section on source-changeover systems)Manual source-changeover systemsRemote-operated and automatic source-changeover systems

61

2

NS100NA NS160NA NS250NA NS400NA NS630NA2 (1), 3,4 2 (1), 3,4 2 (1), 3,4 3, 4 3, 4c c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c c

c c c c c c c c c c

100 160 250 400 630750 750 750 750 7508 8 8 8 8690 690 690 690 690500 500 500 500 500AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630

100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 6302.6 3.6 4.9 7.1 8.5

330 330 330 330 330

1800 2500 3500 5000 60001800 2500 3500 5000 6000690 960 1350 1930 2320c c c c c50000 40000 20000 15000 1500050000 40000 20000 15000 1500030000 (50000 - In/2) 20000 (40000 - In/2) 10000 (20000 - In/2) 6000 (12000 - In/2) 4000 (8000 - In/2)30000 (50000 - In/2) 20000 (40000 - In/2) 10000 (20000 - In/2) 6000 (12000 - In/2) 4000 (8000 - In/2)c c c c cIII III III III III

c cc c

c cc cc cc cc cc cc c

c cc c

c cc c

c c105 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 1101.5 to 1.8 5.22.0 to 2.2 6.8

c cc c

62


2

Control and disconnectionCompact NS630bNA to NS1600NAswitch-disconnectors

Installation standards require upstreamprotection.

(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.(2) Protection by upstream type NS or NW circuit breaker:see additional technical information.







220/240 V380/415 V440/480 V (1)

500/525 V660/690 V

DC250 V (1 P)500 V (2 P in series)

Short-circuit making capacity lcm (kA peak) minimum (switch-disconnector alone)maximum (with protectioncircuit breaker upstream) (2)

Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 0.5 s1 s20 s


electrical AC 690 V AC 22A/In440 V AC 23A/In

Positive contact indicationPollution degree

ProtectionAdd-on earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay



Remote communication by busDevice status indications (communicating auxiliary contacts)Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism)



Dimensions (mm) fixed 3PW x H x D 4PWeight (kg) fixed 3P

4P

Source-changeover system (see section on source-changeover systems)Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic

Compact NS800NA

63

2

NS630bNA NS800NA NS1000NA NS1250NA NS1600NA3. 4 3. 4 3. 4 3. 4 3. 4c c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c cc c c c c

630 800 1000 1250 1600750 750 750 750 7508 8 8 8 8690 690 690 690 690500 500 500 500 500AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1520DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A- - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - -50 50 50 50 50330 330 330 330 330

25 25 25 25 2517 17 17 17 174 4 4 4 4c c c c c10000 10000 10000 10000 100002000 2000 2000 2000 10002000 2000 2000 2000 1000c c c c cIII III III III III

c

ccc

cc

ccc327 x 210 x 147327 x 280 x 1471418

c

64


2







220/240 V380/415 V440/480 V (1)

500/525 V660/690 V

Short-circuit making capacity lcm (kA peak) minimum (switch-disconnector alone)maximum (with protectioncircuit breaker upstream) (2)

Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 0.5 s1 s20 s


electrical AC 690 V AC 22A/In440 V AC 23A/In

Positive contact indicationPollution degree

ProtectionAdd-on earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay



InstallationAccessories escutcheonsDimensions (mm) fixed 3PW x H x D 4PWeight (kg) fixed 3P

4P

Source-changeover system (see section on source-changeover systems)Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic

Control and disconnectionCompact NS1600b to 3200NAswitch-disconnectors

Installation standards require upstreamprotection. However, Compact NS1600b to3200NA switch-disconnectors are self-protected for all currents higher than 55 kA.

Compact NS2000NA

(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.(2) Protection by upstream type NS or NW circuit breaker:see additional technical information.


65

2

NS1600bNA NS2000NA NS2500NA NS3200NA3. 4 3. 4 3. 4 3. 4c c c c- - - -- - - -c c c c- - - -- - - -- - - -

1600 2000 2500 3200750 750 750 7508 8 8 8690 690 690 690500 500 500 500AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 32001600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 32001600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 32001600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 32001600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200115 115 115 115187 187 187 187

40 40 40 4028 28 28 284.7 4.7 4.7 4.7c c c c6000 6000 6000 60001000 1000 1000 40001000 1000 1000 2000c c c cIII III III III

c

ccc

c350 x 420 x 160350 x 535 x 1602336

-

66


2

Source-changeover systemsPresentation

Service sectorc Hospital operating rooms.c Safety systems for tall buildings.c Computer rooms (banks, insurance companies, etc.).c Lighting systems in shopping centres.

Manual source-changeover systemsThis is the most simple type. Intervention by technical personnel is required, i.e.transfer from the normal source to the replacement source is not immediate.

A manual source-changeover system can be installed on two to threemanually-controlled circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors. Interlocking ismechanical. Interlocks prevent connection to both sources at the same time, evenmomentarily.

Remote-operated source-changeover systemsThis is the most commonly employed system. No human intervention is required.Switching from the normal to the replacement source is controlled electrically.

A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two or three circuitbreakers or switch-disconnectors linked by an electrical interlocking system(different configurations possible). Device operation is backed up by a mechanicalinterlocking fixture that prevents parallel connection if the electrical systemmalfunctions or if an incorrect manual operation is attempted.

Automatic source-changeover systemsAn automatic controller may be added to the remote-operated source-changeoversystem for automatic source control according to programmable operating modes.This solution ensures optimum energy management:c Switching to a replacement source depending on external requirementsc Management of power sourcesc Regulationc Emergency source replacement, etc.

The automatic controller may be fitted with an option for communication with asupervisor.

Industryc Assembly lines.c Engine rooms on ships.c Critical auxiliaries in thermal power stations.

Infrastructurec Port and railway installations.c Runway lighting systems.c Control systems for military installations.

For complete, in-depth information, seethe “Interpact, Compact, Masterpactsource-changeover systems” catalogue.

67

2

Manual source-changeover systems

Interlocking of two or three toggle-controlled devicesTwo devices can be interlocked using this system. Two identical interlockingsystems can be used to interlock three devices installed side by side, in which caseone device is in the ON position and the two others are in the OFF position.The system is locked using one or two padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm).

Combinations of Normal and Replacement devicesThere are two interlocking-system models:c Compact NS100 to 250c Compact NS400 to 630 (can also be used for a Compact NS100 to 250).Devices must be either all fixed or all withdrawable.

Interlocking of two devices with rotary handlesThe rotary handles are padlocked with the devices in the OFF position.The mechanism inhibits the two devices being closed at the same time, but doesallow for both to be open (OFF) at the same time.

Combinations of Normal and Replacement devicesAll Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotaryhandles can be interlocked. Interlocking of a Compact NS100 to 630 with aCompact NS630b to 1600 is not possible.

Interlocking of a number of devices using keylocks(captive keys)Interlocking uses two identical keylocks with a single key. This solution enablesinterlocking between two devices that are physically distant or that havesignificantly different characteristics, for example between a low and amedium-voltage device, or between Compact NS circuit breakers andswitch-disconnectors. A system of wall-mounted units with captive keys makespossible a large number of combinations between many devices.

Combinations of Normal and Replacement devicesAll Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotaryhandles or motor mechanisms can be interlocked.

Interlocking of two devices on a base plateA base plate designed for two Compact devices can be installed horizontally orvertically on a mounting rail. Interlocking is carried out on the base plate by amechanism located behind the devices. Access to the device controls and trip unitsis not blocked.

Combinations of Normal and Replacement devicesAll manually operated Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers andswitch-disconnectors can be interlocked.Devices must be fixed or plug-in versions, with or without earth-leakage protectionor measurement modules.

Interlocking of two toggle-controlled devices

A manual source-changeover systemcan be installed on two to threemanually-operated circuit breakers orswitch-disconnectors. Interlocking ismechanical.Interlocks prevent connection to bothsources at the same time, evenmomentarily.

Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles

Interlocking with keylocks

Interlocking on base plates

68


2

Source-changeover systemsRemote-operated systems

A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of:1 circuit breaker QN equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to

the Normal source2 circuit breaker QR equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to

the Replacement source3 mounting base plate with mechanical interlocking (NS100 to 630) or an interlocking system

using rods or cables (NS630b to 1600)4 electrical interlocking unit. IVE for NS100 to 630 or an electrical system provided by the

installer for NS630b to 1600. Electrical interlocking system example: part no. 51156903 in thesource-changeover system catalogue.

Switching between sources can be automated by adding:5 ACP auxiliary control plate6 BA or UA controller, or an electrical system provided by the installer for NS630b to 1600.

Electrical system example: part no. 51156904 and 51156904 in the source-changeover system catalogue.

Accessory:7 coupling accessory (downstream connection) for NS100 to 630.

Source-changeover system without a controllerIn this case, the automatic-control system to initiate changeovers between theNormal and Replacement sources under predefined conditions must be providedby the installation designer.

Source-changeover system with a controllerIn this case, changeovers between the Normal and Replacement sources underpredefined conditions are initiated by a Merlin Gerin controller.

Coupling accessoryThis accessory may be used with the source-changeover system (with or without acontroller) to facilitate connections.

2

4

1

3

Remote-operated source-changeover system

ControllerAuxiliary control plate

5

6

7


Interlocking by rods Interlocking by cables

69

2

Controller BA UAFour-position switch

Automatic operation c cForced operation on Normal source c cForced operation on Replacement source c cStop (both Normal and Replacement sources OFF) c cAutomatic operation

Monitoring of the Normal source and automatic changeover c cEngine generator set start-up control cDelayed shutdown (adjustable) of engine generator set cLoad shedding and reconnection of non-priority loads cChangeover to Replacement source if one of the Normal- csource phases is absent

TestBy opening of the P25M circuit breaker upstream cof the controllerBy pressing the test button on the front of the controller cIndications

Circuit-breaker status indication on the front c cof the controller: ON, OFF, fault tripAutomatic-mode indication contact c cOther functions

Selection of type of Normal source c(single-phase or three-phase)Voluntary transfer to Replacement source c c(e.g. energy-management commands)During peak-tariff periods (energy-management commands), cforced operation on Normal source if Replacement source isnot operationalAdditional control contact (not in controller). c cTransfer to Replacement source only if contact closed(e.g. UR frequency check)Replacement-source maximum start-up time setting cOptions

Communications option cPower supply

Control voltages (1) 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz c c380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz c c440 V 60 Hz c c

Operating thresholdsUndervoltage 0.35 Un i voltage i 0.7 Un c cPhase failure 0.5 Un i voltage i 0.7 Un cVoltage presence voltage u 0.85 Un c cCharacteristics of output contacts

Rated thermal current (A) 8Minimum load 10 mA at 12 V

AC DCUtilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC12 DC13Operational current (A) 24 V 8 7 5 6 8 2

48 V 8 7 5 5 2 -110 V 8 6 4 4 0.6 -220/240 V 8 6 4 3 - -250 V - - - - 0.4 -380/415 V 5 - - - - -440 V 4 - - - - -660/690 V - - - - - -

(1) Power supplied by the ACP auxiliary control plate. The supply voltage must be the same forthe ACP plate, the IVE unit and the circuit breaker operating mechanisms. If this voltage is thesame as the distribution-system voltage, the Normal and Replacement sources can be useddirectly for the power supply. If not, a BC-type or equivalent isolation transformer must be used.

BA controller

Controllers

UA controller

When used with a remote-operatedsource-changeover system, the BA or UAcontrollers initiate the automaticchangeover operations according touser-defined sequences.

70


2

CommunicationCompact NS100 to 630

Integration of the circuit breaker or theswitch-disconnector in a supervison systemrequires either the communicatingauxiliaries or the SC150 interface. Compactdevices fit perfectly in the SMS Powerlogicelectrical installation management systemby communicating using Digipact protocols.An external gateway offers communicationvia other networks including:

ProfibusEthernet

Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contactsand motor-mechanism module

Withdrawable Compact NS on its chassis equipped withcommunicating auxiliary contacts

There are two possibilities for the 100 to 630 A range:

Communicating auxiliariesThey replace the standard auxiliaries and connect directly to the Digipact bus.Three equipment levels:

Communicating auxiliary contacts, comprising:- OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts- Electronic module- Prefabricated wiring.Communicating auxiliary contacts and motor-mechanism module, comprising:- OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts- Motor-mechanism module (220 V AC) (1)- Electronic module- Prefabricated wiring.Communicating carriage switches for the chassis, comprising:- CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) contacts- Electronic module- Wiring connector.SC150 interface

Using the SC150 interface, it is possible to integrate a device equipped with non-communicating auxiliaries into a supervison system.The SC150 interface is used to connect:

The auxiliary contacts on the circuit breaker (OF, SD, SDE, SDV, CD, CE)The remote-operation system (on, off, reset)The communication output for the STR53UE and STR43ME electronic tripunits equipped with the COM optionAn unassigned digital input.

SC150 indication and control interface

(1) For voltages other than 220 V AC, use a standard motor-mechanism module (non-communicating) together with an SC150 indication and control interface.

71

2

Overview of functions

Compact withcommunicating SC150auxiliaries

Device identificationAddress c cRating - -

Indication of status conditionsOF (on/off) c cSD (trip indication) c cSDE (fault-trip indication) c cCE/CD (connected/disconnected position) c cControls

ON/OFF c cLED reset c cProtection settings

Reading of the protection settings cOperating and maintenance aids

Measurements: currents cFault readings: type of fault cIndications: operation counter c c

RS 485

RS 232C,Ethernet

Data concentratorDC150

Digipact Bus

Device

CommunicationBus

Communicationinterface

Software

Compact NS withcommunicatingauxiliary contactsand motor mechanism

Compact circuit breaker with standardauxiliary contacts and motor mechanism.Trip unit with the COM option.

SC150 indication andcontrol interface

: hard wire: communication bus

72


2

CommunicationCompact NS630b to 1600COM option in Compact

The COM option is required for integrationof the circuit breaker or switch-disconnectorin a supervision system.Compact uses the Digipact or Modbuscommunications protocol for fullcompatibility with the SMS PowerLogicelectrical-installation management systems.An external gateway is available forcommunication on other networks:c Profibusc Ethernet…

Digipact "device"communication module.

Digipact "chassis"communication module

For fixed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:

c A "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unitand supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manuallyoperated devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices)and its kit for connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module.

For withdrawable circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:c A "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit

and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manuallyoperated devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices)and its kit for connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module.

c A "chassis" communication module supplied separately with its set of sensors(CE, CD and CT contacts).

Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker indicationcontacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses.

Digipact or Modbus "device" communication moduleThis module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits informationon the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the controlunit and the communication module.Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.

Digipact or Modbus "chassis" communication moduleThis module is independent of the control unit. The Modbus "chassis"communication module makes it possible to address the chassis and to maintainthe address when the circuit breaker is in the disconnected position.Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.

Communicating motor-mechanism moduleA bus link is used to transmit remote ON/OFF orders to the circuit breaker.A communicating motor-mechanism module must be used.The remote-tripping function (MX or MN) is independent of the communication option.

Modbus "chassis"communication module

Modbus "device"communication module

1 "device" communication module2 "chassis" communication module3 OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors

OFSDSDE

3

1

OFSDE

1

3

5

CTCE

CD OFSDE

2

4

35

CTCE

CD OFSDSDE

2

3

4

11

Communicationbus

Communicationbus

Communicationbus

Manually operatedfixed device

Electrically operatedfixed device

Electrically operateddrawout device

Communicationbus

Manually operateddrawout device

4 CE, CD and CT "chassis" sensors5 communicating motor-mechanism module

73

2

Compact switch-disconnectors are compatible only with the Digipact COM option.

Compact circuit breakers are compatible with the Digipact or Modbus COM option.The COM option may be used with all types of control units to:c Identify the devicec Indicate status conditionsc Control the device.

Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM optionalso offers:c Setting of the protections functionsc Analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and

maintenance purposes

ModuleEventTime

POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo

Ready

File Edit View Setup ToolsControl Display Reports Window Help

ONLINE: DEMO 9:30No working system

5 secondsSampling Mode : MANUAL

0,00

0,20

0,40

0,60

0,80

1,00

1,20

H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12Harmonics

Phase A-N Voltage - Harmonics Analysis

Phase 1-N

Harmonics(RMS)

H2: 0.01H3: 0.45H4: 0.03H5: 0.45H6: 0.04H7: 1.27H8: 0.05H9: 0.42H10: 0.01H11: 1.03H12: 0.07

H1: 118.09

OK

Fundamental:

RMS:

RMS-H:

Peak:

CF:

THD:


switch-disconnector with circuit breaker withcommunication bus communication busDigipact Modbus Digipact Modbus

device identificationaddress c - AZASS A S AZAArating - - A AZAAtype of device - -type of control unit - - A AZAAtype of long-time rating plug - - A AZAAstatus indicationsOF (on/off) c - S A AZAASD (trip indication) c - S A AZAASDE (fault-trip indication) c - S A AZAACE/CD (connected/ c - S A AZAAdisconnected position)

controlsMX/XF ON/OFF - - S A AZAAspring charging - -reset of the mechanical - - AZAindicator

protections settingsreading of protections settings A AZAAoperating and maintenance aidsmeasurements

current A AZAAfault readings

type of fault AZAANote.See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection.

74


2

CommunicationCompact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)

Compact in a communication network

Compact

RS 485

RS 232C,Ethernet

Compact

Data concentratorDC150

Digipact Bus Modbus Bus

Device

CommunicationBus


Software

DevicesCircuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units may be connected to eithera Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made availabledepends on the type of Micrologic control unit (S, A) and on the type ofcommunication bus (Digipact or Modbus).Switch-disconnectors may be connected exclusively to the Digipact communicationbus.

Communication bus

DigipactThe Digipact bus is the internal bus of the low-voltage switchboard in which theDigipact communicating devices are installed (Compact with Digipact COM,PM150, SC150, UA150, etc.). This bus must be equipped with a DC150 dataconcentrator (see the Powerlogic System catalogue).

AddressesAddressing is carried out by the DC150 data concentrator.

Number of devicesThe maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Digipact bus iscalculated in terms of “communication points”. These points correspond to theamount of traffic the bus can handle. The total number of points for the variousdevices connected to a single bus must not exceed 100.If the required devices represent more than 100 points, add a second Digipactinternal bus.

Communicating device Number of pointsDC150 data concentrator 4Micrologic + Digipact COM 4PM150 4SC150 4UA150 4

Length of busThe maximum recommended length for the Digipact internal bus is 200 meters.

Bus power sourcePower is supplied by the DC150 data concentrator (24 V)..

75

2

ModbusThe Modbus RS485 (JBus) system is an open bus on which communicatingModbus devices (Compact with Modbus COM, PM300, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.) areinstalled. All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be connected to the bus.

AddressesThe software layer of the Modbus protocol can manage up to 255 addresses (1 to 255).The “device” communication module comprises three addresses linked to:

Circuit-breaker manager;Measurement manager;Protection manager.

The “chassis” communication module comprises one address linked to:The chassis manager.

The division of the system into four managers secures data exchange with thesupervision system and the circuit-breaker actuators.The manager addresses are automatically derived from the circuit-breaker address@xx entered via the Micrologic control unit (the default address is 47).

logic addresses@xx Circuit-breaker manager (1 to 47)@xx + 50 Chassis manager (51 to 97)@xx + 200 Measurement managers (201 to 247)@xx + 100 Protection manager (101 to 147)

Number of devicesThe maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus busdepends on the type of device (Compact with Modbus COM, PM300, Sepam,Vigilohm, etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the volume of dataexchanged and the desired response time. The RS485 physical layer offers up to32 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves).A fixed device requires only one connection point (communication module on thedevice).A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on thedevice and on the chassis).The number must never exceed 31 fixed devices or 15 drawout devices.

Length of busThe maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 1200 meters.

Bus power sourceA 24 V DC power supply is required (less than 20% ripple, insulation class II).

Communication interfaceThe Modbus bus may be connected to the central processing device in any ofthree manners:

Direct link to a PLC. The communication interface is not required if the PLC isequipped with a Modbus port;Direct link to a computer. The Modbus (RS485) / Serial port (RS232)communication interface is required;Connection to a TCP/IP (Ethernet) network. The Modbus (RS485) / TCP/IP(Ethernet) communication interface is required.

SoftwareTo make use of the information provided by the communicating devices, softwarewith a Modbus driver must be used.

Micrologic utilitiesThis is a set of Modbus drivers that may be used with a PC to:

Display the variables (I, U, P, E, etc.) with the DDS (Data Display Software)application;Read/write the settings with the RSS (Remote Setting Software) application;Remotely control (ON / OFF) the device with the CSS (Control CommandSoftware) application.

This software is available on request.

System Manager Software (SMS)SMS is power management software for the control and monitoring of LV and MVelectrical installations.The SMS family includes a number of products for all types of applications, fromstandalone systems to networked power management of multiple buildings.SMS can communicate with all intelligent devices of the electrical installationincluding:c Power Meter and Circuit Monitor productsc LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectorsc Sepam units.

76


2

CommunicationCompact NS1600b to 3200COM option in Compact

For fixed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:

c A "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unitand supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts).

Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breakerindication contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses.

Digipact or Modbus "device" communication moduleThis module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits informationon the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the controlunit and the communication module.Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.

1 "Device" communication module2 OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors

2

1

OFSDSDE

Bus decommunication

BoîtierCOM

The COM option is required for integrationof the circuit breaker or switch-disconnectorin a supervision system.Compact uses the Digipact or Modbuscommunications protocol for fullcompatibility with the SMS PowerLogicelectrical-installation management systems.An external gateway is available forcommunication on other networks:c Profibusc Ethernet…

Digipact "device"communication module.

Modbus "device"communication module

77

2

Compact switch-disconnectors are compatible only with the Digipact COM option.

Compact circuit breakers are compatible with the Digipact or Modbus COM option.The COM option may be used with all types of control units to:c Identify the devicec Indicate status conditionsc Control the device.

Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM optionalso offers:c Setting of the protections functionsc Analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and

maintenance purposes

ModuleEventTime

POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo

Ready

File Edit View Setup ToolsControl Display Reports Window Help

ONLINE: DEMO 9:30No working system

5 secondsSampling Mode : MANUAL

0,00

0,20

0,40

0,60

0,80

1,00

1,20

H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12Harmonics

Phase A-N Voltage - Harmonics Analysis

Phase 1-N

Harmonics(RMS)

H2: 0.01H3: 0.45H4: 0.03H5: 0.45H6: 0.04H7: 1.27H8: 0.05H9: 0.42H10: 0.01H11: 1.03H12: 0.07

H1: 118.09

OK

Fundamental:

RMS:

RMS-H:

Peak:

CF:

THD:


switch-disconnector with circuit breaker withcommunication bus communication busDigipact Modbus Digipact Modbus

device identificationaddress c - AZASS A S AZAArating - - A AZAAtype of device - -type of control unit - - A AZAAtype of long-time rating plug - - A AZAAstatus indicationsOF (on/off) c - S A AZAASD (trip indication) c - S A AZAASDE (fault-trip indication) c - S A AZAAprotections settingsreading of protections settings A AZAAoperating and maintenance aidsmeasurements

current A AZAAfault readings

type of fault AZAANote.See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection.

78


2

Installation, connectionand accessoriesCompact NS80H-MA

Sealable terminalshield


Auxiliarycontact

Auxiliarycontact

Extended rotaryhandle

Direct rotaryhandle

Voltage release

DIN-railplate

79

2

Compact NSC100N

Front accessory for NSC100N (45 mm standard door cutout)



Auxiliarycontact


Voltage release

45 mm front

80


2

Installation, connectionand accessoriesCompact NS80H-MA,NSC100N

NS80H-MA and NSC100N:mounting on backplate ormounting plate.

NS80H-MA and NSC100N:mounting on DIN rail(optional).

Standard 45 mm front,optional on NSC100N.

InstallationCompact NS80H-MA and NSC100N circuit breakers may be mounted vertically,horizontally or flat on their back without any derating of characteristics. They aredesigned for easy installation in the various types of switchboards of each marketand country.Mounting on a DIN rail is possible using a special adapter.These three circuit breakers are available in the fixed, front-connection version.

Front connection of bare cables

Distribution connector

Terminal shields

Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N circuit breakers areequipped as standard with connectors for bare copperor aluminium cables from 1.5 to 70 mm2.

Distribution connectorThis connector screws directly to the standardconnectors. It is used to connect up to three cables:c Flexible cables from 1 to 10 mm2

c Rigid cables from 1.5 to 16 mm2

c With crimped or self-crimping ferrules from1.5 to 4 mm2.

Insulation of live partsTerminal shieldsInsulating accessories used for protection againstdirect contact with power circuits (degree of protectionIP 40). They are supplied with sealing accessories.For voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory.

Installation positions

81

2

MX or MN voltage release

Indication contactsA single type of contact, complying with the IEC 60947-5 internationalrecommendation, provides different indication functions, depending on where it isinserted in the device.c OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contactsc SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:v An overloadv A short-circuitv Operation of a voltage release.Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.

All the above auxiliary contacts are also available in “low-level” versions capable ofswitching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits).

Characteristics

Contacts Standard Low levelRated thermal current (A) 6 5Minimum load 10 mA at 24 V 1 mA at 4 VUtilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2

110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -

Remote trippingMX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker.

MN undervoltage releaseThis release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below atripping threshold:c Tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltagec Circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the

rated voltage.

Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standardIEC 60947-2.

Time-delay unit for an MN release (Compact NS80H-MA)Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting i 200 ms :

It is used in conjunction with:c A 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V ACc A 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC.

MX shunt releaseTrips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un.Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained.

OperationWhen the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must bereset locally.MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary,is not possible.

Mechanical characteristicsc Endurance is equal to 50% of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breakerc The releases clip in behind the front coverc Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm2 to integrated terminal blocks.

Electrical characteristicsc Consumption:v Pick-up (MX): < 30 VAv Seal-in (MN): < 5 VAc Response time: < 50 ms.

Indication contacts

Common-point changeover contacts provide remote circuit-breaker status information. They can be used for indications,electrical locking, relaying, etc.

82


2

Compact NS80H-MA with an extended rotary handle

Compact NS80H-MA with a direct rotary handle

Rotary handlesThere are two types of rotary handle:c Direct rotary handlec Extended rotary handle.

There are two models:c Standard with a black handlec VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control.

Direct rotary handle (NS80H-MA and NSC100N)Degree of protection IP40, IK07.The direct rotary handle maintains:c Visibility of and access to trip unit settingsc Suitability for isolationc Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and trippedc Access to the “push to trip” buttonc Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,

shackle diameter Ø 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).

It replaces the circuit-breaker front cover.

Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations:c Motor control centre (MCC) switchboards:v Door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ONv Circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is openc A higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07)c Machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP 54, IK08.

Extended rotary handleDegree of protection IP 55, IK08.

This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back ofswitchboards, from the switchboard front.

It maintains:c Suitability for isolationc Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and trippedc Access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is openc Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,

shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).

The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked.

The extended rotary handle is made up of:c A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws)c An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the

same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontallyc An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance (min/max distance

between back of circuit breaker and door is 185/600 mm).

Installation, connectionand accessoriesCompact NS80H-MA, NSC100N(cont.)

83

2

Locking systemsLocking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2.Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diametersranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).

Toggle locking using a removable device

Outgoing-circuit identificationCompact NS80H-MA and NSC100N devices come with clip-in labels for hand-written indications.It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels (part number AB1-** (8 digits).

Identification accessories

84


2

Voltage release

Auxiliary contact

Connectors

Interphase barriers



Voltage-presenceindicator

Rear connector


Direct rotaryhandle

Motor-mechanismmodule

One-piecespreader

Insulation-monitoringmodule

Current-transformermodule

Ammeter module

Trip unit

Rear insulatingscreens

Installation, connectionand accessoriesCompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version)

85

2

Compact NS100 to 630(plug-in and withdrawable versions)



Voltage-presenceindicator

Insulation-monitoringmodule

Current-transformer module

Ammeter module

Trip unit

Connectors forwithdrawabledevices

Voltage release

Auxiliary contact

Interphase barriers


Direct rotaryhandle

Motor-mechanismmodule

Circuit-breakerside plate

Chassis sideplate

Control-wireconnectionon chassis

Control-wireconnectionplate

Plug-in base

Terminal extensions and spreaders

Rear connectors

One-piecespreader

Connectors

86


2

Installation

Fixed circuit breakersCompact circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or flat on theirback without any derating of characteristics. They are designed for easy installationin the various types of switchboards of each market and country.

Circuit breaker on a plug-in base

Protection against direct contacts with power circuitsc Circuit breaker plugged in = IP4c Circuit breaker removed = IP2.c Circuit breaker removed, base equipped with shutters = IP4

Parts of a plug-in configurationc Compact circuit breakerc Set of power connectors added to the circuit breakerc Plug-in base for mounting on a backplate or on railsc Insulating screen, for use when the circuit breaker is installed on a backplate

with front connectionsc Safety trip, installed on the circuit breaker, that causes automatic tripping if the

circuit breaker is ON, before engaging or withdrawing it. The safety trip doesnot prevent circuit breaker operation, even when it has been removed.

c Mandatory short terminal shields.

AccessoriesInsulating accessories can be used to:c Protect against direct contactc Increase insulation between phases.

Mounting on a backplate Mounting through a frontpanel

Mounting on rails

Compact NS250H on a plug-in base

Installation, connectionand accessoriesCompact NS100 to 630

Mounting on railsMounting on a backplate(solid or slotted)

Mounting on DIN rail (withadapter)

Mounting on a Prisma functional mounting plate.

Fixed Compact NS250H

The plug-in configuration makes it possibleto:c Extract and/or rapidly replace the

circuit breaker without having to touchconnections

c Allow for the addition of future circuitsat a later date.



87

2


Compact NS250H on a withdrawable chassis

Circuit breaker on a withdrawable chassis

The chassis is made up of two side plates installed on the base and two otherplates mounted on the circuit breaker.

Accessoriesc Auxiliary contacts for installation on the fixed part, indicating the “connected”

and “disconnected” positionsc Toggle collar for circuit breakers with a toggle mounted through a front panel,

intended to maintain the degree of protection whatever the position of thecircuit breaker (supplied with a toggle extension)

c Keylock which, depending on the bolt fitted, can be used to:v Prevent insertion for connectionv Lock the circuit breaker in the connected or disconnected positions.c Telescopic shaft for extended rotary handles.

Front and rear connectionsFixed, plug-in and withdrawable Compact devices may all be equipped with frontand rear connections.

Fixed device

Plug-in and withdrawable devices

c Disconnected position - the powercircuits are disconnected, but thecircuit breaker is still on the chassisand may still be operated (ON, OFF,push-to-trip).

c The circuit breaker may be lockedusing 1 to 3 padlocks (shacklediameter 5 to 8 mm), to preventconnection.

c The auxiliaries can be tested (withmanual auxiliary connector).

Front connection Rear connection

Front connection Rear connection Rear connection througha backplate

Connected Disconnected Removed

88


2

Installation, connectionand accessoriesCompact NS100 to 630 (cont.)

Connection of fixed devices

Front connection of bars or cableswith lugsThe Compact NS100 to NS630 devices are equippedas standard with terminals comprising snap-in nutswith screws (M8 for NS100 to 250, M10 for NS400 to630) for direct connection to insulated bars or cableswith lugs.Additional terminal extensions (right-angle, edgewise,spreaders) are available for all connectionrequirements. Spreaders (52.5 or 70 mm pitch) maybe fitted on the Compact NS400 to 630.

LugsLugs are different for copper and aluminium cables.They are supplied with interphase barriers and arecompatible with the long terminal shields.c The small lugs for copper cables may be used for

cables with the following cross-sectional areas:v 120, 150 or 185 mm2 (NS100 to 250)v 240 or 300 mm2 (NS400 to 630).Crimping by hexagonal barrels or punching.c The small lugs for aluminium cables may be used

for cables with the following cross-sectional areas:v 150 or 185 mm2 (NS100 to 250)v 240 or 300 mm2 (NS400 to 630).Crimping by hexagonal barrels.

SpreadersSpreaders increase the pitch of the terminals.They are not compatible with terminal shields on theCompact NS100 to 250.The one-piece spreader increases the pitch, thusmaking it possible to use the connection accessoriesof a larger device (e.g. a Compact NS100 to 250 canbe fitted with the accessories of a Compact NS400 to630). The one-piece spreader also provides protectionagainst direct contact (see page 91).

Right-angle terminalextensions

Straight terminal extensionsfor NS100 to 250

Spreaders

Edgewise terminalextensions for NS400 to 630

Small lug for copper cables

Small lug for aluminiumcables

One-piece spreader

89

2

Front connection of bare cablesBare-cable connectors for Compact NS devices maybe used for both copper and aluminium cables.

1-cable connectors for Compact NS100 to 250The connectors snap directly on to the deviceterminals or clip onto right-angle and straight terminalextensions as well as spreaders.

1-cable and 2-cable connectors for CompactNS400 to 630The connectors are screwed to device terminals orright-angle terminal extensions.

Distribution connectors for Compact NS100 to 250These connectors are screwed directly to deviceterminals. Interphase barriers are supplied withdistribution connectors, but may be replaced by longterminal shields. Each connector can receive sixcables with cross-sectional areas ranging from 1.5 to35 mm2 each.

Polybloc distribution block for Compact NS100 to 630The Polybloc connects directly to the device terminalsand is used to connect up to six or nine flexible or rigidcables with cross-sectional areas not exceeding10 mm2, to each pole. Connection is made to springterminals without screws.

Rear connectionRear connections for bars or cables with lugs areavailable in two lengths. Bars may be positioned flat,on edge or at 45° angles depending on how the rearconnections are positioned.The rear connections are simply fitted to the deviceconnection terminals. All combinations of rearconnection lengths and positions are possible on agiven device. The device is mounted on a backplate.For the connection of cables without lugs, the 1-cableconnectors for Compact NS100 to 250 may be simplyclipped onto the rear connections.

1-cable connectorfor NS100 to 250



Distribution connectorfor NS100 to 250

Polybloc distribution blockfor NS100 to 250

Four positions

Two lengths

Connectionof bare cablesto NS100 to 250.

90


2


Connection of plug-in devices

Connection of bars or cables with lugsThe plug-in base is equipped with terminals which, depending on their orientation,serve for front and rear connection. For rear connection of a base mounted on abackplate, the terminals must be replaced by insulated, long right-angle terminalextensions.For Compact NS630 devices, connection most often requires the 52.5 or 70 mmpitch spreaders.

Connection accessoriesSee the “Connection of fixed devices” section.

Connection of bare cablesAll terminals may be equipped with bare-cable connectors. See the “Connection offixed devices” section.

Front connection Front connection withspreaders

Rear connection

Rear connection of a basemounted on a backplate

Plug-in base for CompactNS100 to 250 equipped with1-cable connectors

Plug-in base for CompactNS400 to 630 equipped with2-cable connectors

91

2

One-piece spreaderConnection of large cables may require an increase inthe distance between the device terminals. The one-piece spreader is an accessory that can also be fittedon Interpact INS switch-disconnectors. It offers thefollowing features:c Increases the pitch of the circuit-breaker terminals

to correspond to that of the next largest framesize.

c Compatible with all the connection accessoriesavailable for the next largest frame size(connectors, terminal extensions, etc.)

c Enhances insulation between phases incomparison with standard spreaders.

NS100 to 250 NS400 to 630Pitch without 35 45spreaders (mm)Pitch with standard 45 52.5 or 70spreaders (mm)Pitch with one-piece 45 70spreader (mm)

MountingWhen equipped with a one-piece spreader, CompactNS circuit breakers may be installed either at the backof a switchboard or on the front panel with a raiser.c Devices with different frame sizes can thus be

aligned in the switchboardc The same mounting plate can be used for all

devices (including Interpact INSswitch-disconnectors).

Mounting at the back of aswitchboard

Mounting behind the frontpanel with a raiser

Connection and insulationaccessories are identical tothose for Interpact INSswitch-disconnectors

One-piece spreader

92


2


Insulation of live parts

Terminal shields

Interphase barriers

Rear insulating screens

Compact NS equipped with terminal shields.

Terminal shieldsTerminal shields are sealable insulating accessoriesused for protection against direct contact with powercircuits (degree of protection IP40, IK07). They aresupplied with sealing accessories.

Terminal-shield selectionc Fixed circuit breaker, front connection - long

terminal shieldsc Fixed circuit breaker, rear connection - short

terminal shields.c For voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are

mandatory.c For voltages > 600 V, special connection kit with

terminal shields and insulating screensc For Compact NS400 to 630 with spreaders,

special terminal shields for spreadersc For withdrawable circuit breaker (plug-in and

chassis type), short terminal shields on the deviceare mandatory. Terminal shields on the base arepossible.

Long terminal shields for plug-in bases are used to:c Protect against direct contact with power circuits

(degree of protection IP40, IK07)c increase insulation between phases.

Insulating accessories for plug-in bases include:c An adapter offering the same connection

possibilities as the circuit breakerc Long terminal shields for the plug-in base.

Interphase barriersSafety accessories for maximum insulation at thepower-connection points:c They clip easily onto the circuit breakerc Not compatible with terminal shieldsc Special version for plug-in bases.

Rear insulating screensSafety accessories for insulation between connectionsand the backplate. Compatible with terminal shields orinterphase barriers.

93

2

Connection of electrical auxiliaries

Fixed configurationAuxiliary circuits exit the device through a knock-out in the front cover.

Plug-in and withdrawable configurations

Automatic auxiliary connectorsAuxiliary circuits exit the circuit breaker via one to three automatic auxiliaryconnectors (nine wires each). These are made up of:c A moving part, connected to the circuit breaker via a support (one support per

circuit breaker)c A fixed part, mounted on the plug-in base, equipped with connectors for bare

cables up to 2.5 mm2.

Selection of automatic auxiliary connectors.For Compact NS400 to 630, connection wires for the options installed with trip unitSTR53UE also exit via the automatic auxiliary connectors.

Manual auxiliary connector for withdrawable configurationsWithdrawable circuit breakers may be equipped with one to three plugs with ninewires each. In “disconnected” position, the auxiliaries remain connected and cantherefore be tested by operating the circuit breaker.

MN/MX

OF1 OF2 SD SDEOF3

SDV

motor mechanismORrotary handle

MN/MX

OF1 SD SDE OF2

SDV

motor mechanismORrotary handle

Compact NS100/160/250


Each auxiliary is equipped with a terminal block withnumbered terminals for connection of wires up to:c 1.5 mm2 for auxiliary contacts and voltage releasesc 2.5 mm2 for the motor-mechanism module.

Compact NS100 to 250 Compact NS400 to 630

Nine-wire manual auxiliaryconnector

connector 1OF1SDMN/MX

connector 2OF2/SDVSDE/MTMT

connector 1OF1SDMN/MX

connector 2OF2SDE/MTMT

connector 3OF3/SDVCOMT

94


2

Indication contactsCommon-point changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker statusinformation and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.

Functionsc OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contactsc SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:v An overloadv A short-circuitv An earth-leakage faultv Operation of a voltage releasev Operation of the “push to trip” buttonv Disconnection when the device is ON.Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.c SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:v An overloadv A short-circuitv An earth-leakage fault.Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.c SDV (Earth-leakage fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has

tripped due to an earth fault.Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.c CAM (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the rotary

handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (earlybreak) or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing (earlymake).

c CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) - microswitch type carriageswitches for withdrawable circuit breakers

Installationc OF, SD, SDE and SDV functions - a single type of contact provides all these

different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device.The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker (or the Vigimodule for the SDV function).The SDE function on a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unitrequires the SDE actuator.c CAM function - the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended).c CE / CD (connected/disconnected) function - two parts must be fitted on the

fixed and moving parts of the chassis.

Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Contacts Standard Low levelRated thermal current (A) 6 5Minimum load 10 mA at 24 V 1 mA at 4 VUtilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2

110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -

Changeover contacts


All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also availablein “low-level” versions capable of switching very lowloads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electroniccircuits).

95

2

Compact NS250L with an extended rotary handle

Compact NS250L with a direct rotary handle



Direct rotary handleDegree of protection IP40, IK07.The direct rotary handle maintains:c Visibility of and access to trip unit settingsc Suitability for isolationc Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and trippedc Access to the “push to trip” buttonc Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,



Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations:c Motor control centre (MCC) switchboards:v Door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ONv Circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is openc A higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07)c Machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP54, IK08.

Extended rotary handleDegree of protection IP 55, IK08.




The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked.The extended rotary handle is made up of:c A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws)c An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the

same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontallyc An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max

distance between the back of circuit breaker and door is:v 185 to 600 mm for Compact NS100 to 250v 210 to 625 mm for Compact NS400 to 630.

For withdrawable configurations, the extended rotary handle is also available with atelescopic shaft with two stable positions.

96


2

Remote trippingMX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker.

MN undervoltage releaseThis release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below atripping threshold:c Tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltagec Circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the

rated voltage.

Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standardIEC 60947-2.

Time-delay unit for an MN releaseEliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting 200 ms.

It is used in conjunction with:c A 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V ACc A 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC.

MX shunt releaseTrips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un.Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained.

OperationWhen the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must bereset locally.MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary,is not possible.

Mechanical characteristicsc Endurance is equal to 50% of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breakerc The releases clip in behind the front coverc Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm2, to integrated terminal blocks.

Electrical characteristicsc Consumption:v Pick-up (MX): < 10 VAv Seal-in (MN and MNR): < 5 VA.c Response time: < 50 ms.

MX or MN voltage release


97

2

1 contact position indicator (suitability for isolation)2 outgoing-circuit identification labels3 spring status indicator (charged, discharged)4 locking device (keylock)5 locking device (OFF position), using 1 to 3 padlocks,

shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied6 manual spring-charging lever7 I (ON) pushbutton8 O (OFF) pushbutton9 manual/auto mode selection switch. The position of this

switch can be indicated remotely10 operations counter (Compact NS400/630)

compactNS400 HUi 750V. Uimp 8kV.Ue(V)

220/240380/415440500/525600/690

10070655020

IEC 947-2UTE VDE BS CEIUNE NEMA

Icu(kA)

cat AIcs = 100% Icu

In = 400A

manu

push OFF

O

2

1push ON

I

O OFF charged

auto

1 3 5 62 4

8910 7

Motor-mechanism moduleWhen equipped with a motor-mechanism module, Compact NS circuit breakersfeature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure operation:c All circuit-breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible,

including trip-unit settings and indications;c Suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible;c Double insulation of the front face.

Applicationsc Local motor-driven operation, centralised operation, automatic distribution

controlc Normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to

optimise energy costsc Load shedding and reconnection to optimise energy costsc Synchrocoupling.

Automatic operationc Circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse-type or maintained

control signalsc Automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping (by MN or MX),

with standard wiringc Mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault.

Manual operationc Transfer to manual mode using a switch (9) with possibility of remote mode

indicationc Circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by 2 pushbuttonsc Recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever 9 timesc Padlocking in OFF position.

Installation and connectionAll installation (fixed, plug-in/withdrawable) and connection possibilities aremaintained.Motor-mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover tointegrated terminals, for cables up to 2.5 mm2.

Accessoriesc Keylock for locking in OFF positionc Operations counter for the Compact NS400 and NS630, indicating the number

of ON and OFF cycles. The counter must be installed on the front of the motor-mechanism module.

Characteristics

Motor mechanism MT100 to MT630Response time (ms) opening < 600

closing < 80Rate cycles/minute max. 4Control voltage (V) DC 24/30 - 48/60

110/130 - 250AC 50/60 Hz 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130

220/240 - 380/440Consumption (1) DC (W) opening i 500

closing i 500AC (VA) opening i 500

closing i 500

Electrical enduranceCircuit breaker + motor-mechanism module, in thousands of operations(IEC 60947-2), at 440 V.

0,2 0,7 10,50,3

NS100

NS160

NS250

NS400

NS630

5040

30

20

15

10

6

4

0,1 I/In

Compact NS250H with motor mechanism

(1) For NS100/250, motor "vibratory" type consider inrushcurrent as 2 In during 10 ms cycling.

98


2

Indications and measurement

Voltage presence indicatorThe indicator detects and indicates that circuit breaker terminals are supplied withpower.

Installationc In the long or short terminal shields, via the knockoutsc Not compatible with the motor-mechanism modulec Upstream or downstream of the circuit breakerc Degree of protection IP40, IK04.

Electrical characteristicsOperates on all networks with voltages ranging from 220 to 550 V AC.

Current-transformer moduleThis module enables direct connection of a measurement device such as anammeter or a Digipact power meter (not supplied).

Installationc Directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminalsc Degree of protection IP40, IK04c Class II insulation between front and the power circuitsc Connection to 6 integrated connectors for cables up to 2.5 mm2.

Electrical characteristicsc Transformer with 5 A secondary winding.c Accuracy class 3 for the following output-power consumptions:v Rating 100 A: 1.6 VAv Rating 150 A: 3 VAv Rating 250 A: 5 VAv Rating 400/630A: 8 VA.

Ammeter and Imax ammeter modulesAmmeter moduleMeasures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the current of each phase (selection ofphases by 3-position switch in front).

Imax ammeter moduleMeasures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the maximum current flowing in themiddle phase. The Imax value can be reset on the front.

Installationc Identical for both types of ammeter modulec Directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminalsc Ammeter clips into module in any of four 90° positions, i.e. can be installed of

devices mounted both vertically and horizontallyc Degree of protection IP40, IK04c Class II insulation between front and the power circuits.

Electrical characteristicsc Ammeter module: accuracy class 4.5c Imax ammeter module:v Accuracy ± 6 %v Maximum currents are displayed only if they last at least 15 minutes.

Compact NS630L with voltage-presence indicator

Compact NS630H with current-transformer module

Compact NS250L with ammeter module


99

2

Insulation-monitoring moduleThis module detects and indicates an insulation drop on a load circuit (TN-S or TTsystems).

Operation is identical to that of a Vigi module, but without circuit-breaker tripping.

Indication by a red LED in front.

An auxiliary contact may be installed for remote insulation-drop indications.

Installationc Directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminalsc Degree of protection: IP40, IK04c Double insulation of the front face.

Electrical characteristicsc Settings: 100, 200, 500 and 1000 mAc Accuracy: -50 +0%c Time delay following drop: 5 to 10 secondsc AC-system voltage: 200 to 440 V AC and 440 to 550 V AC.

CommunicationCommunicating versions of the auxiliary contacts and the motor-mechanismmodule also exist for integration in a Digipact communications system. They simplyreplace the standard electrical auxiliaries.

Using the STR53UE and STR43ME trip units equipped with the COMcommunications option, it is possible to transmit data to Digipact modules:c Settingsc Rms values of phase and neutral currentsc Current of the most heavily loaded phasec Overload alarm in progressc Tripping cause (overload, short-circuit, etc.).

Compact NS250H with insulation-monitoring module

Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contactsand motor-mechanism module

Withdrawable Compact NS equipped with communicatingauxiliary contacts

100


2


Locking systemsLocking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2.Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diametersranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).

Control device Function Means Requiredaccessories

Toggle lock in OFF position padlock removable devicelock in OFF or padlock fixed deviceON position

Direct rotary handle lock in OFF position padlockkeylock locking

device + keylockMCC rotary handle lock in OFF position padlockRotary handle lock in OFF position padlockExtended rotary handle lock in OFF position, keylock keylock

door opening preventedMotor mechanism lock in OFF position, padlock

motor mechanism keylock locking devicelocked out (keylock incorporated)

Locking of the toggle using afixed device

Locking of the toggle using aremovable device

Locking of the rotary handleusing a padlock or a keylock.

101

2

Heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure for Compact NS

Individual enclosuresCompact NS and Vigicompact NS devices with two, three or four poles may beinstalled in individual enclosures.All fixed, front connections are possible, except right-angle and edgewise terminalextensions. Spreaders may be installed in the enclosures intended for InterpactCompact and Vigicompact NS250 to 630 devices.

There are two models of enclosures:c Heavy-duty metal individual enclosure, with:v Metal enclosurev Door with keylock and cut-out for rotary handlev Direct rotary handle (CNOMO, IP 55, IK 08)v Device mounting platev Removable plate (without holes) for cable entry through bottom.c Heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure, with:v Insulating enclosurev Transparent cover, screwed, lead sealable, with cut-out for rotary handlev Extended rotary handlev Device mounting platev Removable plates (without holes) for cable entry through bottom and/or top.

Dimensions (W x H x D in mm)c Metal enclosures:v Compact NS100 to 160: 300 x 400 x 200v Vigicompact NS100 to 160: 400 x 500 x 200v Compact NS250 to 400: 400 x 600 x 200v Compact NS630: 600 x 800 x 275v Vigicompact NS250 to 630: 600 x 800 x 275c Insulating enclosures:v Compact/Vigicompact NS100 to 160:270 x 360 x 235v Compact NS250: 270 x 540 x 235v Compact NS400 to 630: 360 x 720 x 235v Vigicompact NS250 to 630: 360 x 720 x 235

W D

H

102


2

EscutcheonsEscutcheons are an optional feature mounted on theswitchboard door. They increase the degree ofprotection to at least IP40, IK07.

Protection collar for toggle and Vigimodule on withdrawable devicesProtection collars maintain the degree of protection,whatever the position of the device (connected,disconnected).c Front-panel escutcheons are mandatory (same as

those for rotary handles and ammeter modules).c Collars are mounted on the device using two

screws.c Escutcheons are attached to the switchboard.c A toggle extension is supplied with the collar.For the insulation-monitoring module, use the sameelements as for the Vigi module.

Front-panel escutcheons for motor mechanism,rotary handles, ammeter modulesSame as for fixed devices.


Toggle coverc degree of protection

IP43, IK07c fits on the front of the

circuit breaker.

Front-panel escutcheon forrotary handle.Secures to the panel by fourscrews, from the front.For circuit breaker with motormechanism and Vigi module,use the protection collar forfront panel mounting (seebelow).

Front-panel escutcheons fortoggle and Vigi module(NSA160). Secures to thepanel, from the front.

Front-panel escutcheons forammeter module. Secures tothe panel by four screws,from the front.

103

2

Outgoing-circuit identificationCompact NS100 to 630 devices come with clip-in labels for hand-written indications.It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels part number AB1-** :v Compact NS100 to 250: 8 digitsv Compact NS400 to 630: 16 digits.

Sealing accessoriesThis option includes the elements required to fit lead seals to prevent:c Front removalc Rotary-handle removalc Opening of the motor-mechanism modulec Access to auxiliariesc Access to trip-unit settingsc Trip-unit removalc Access to earth-leakage protection settingsc Terminal-shield removalc Access to power connections.

Identification accessories

Sealing accessories

104


2

Installation, connectionand accessoriesCompact NS630b to 1600(fixed version)

Auxiliary contact

Vertical connectionadapter


Voltage release

Connection kitfor connectors

Manual control withfront connection

Connection kitfor connectors

Escutcheon



Direct rotaryhandle

Communicationsmodule

Manual control withrear connection

Electrical control withmixed connection

105

2

Compact NS630 to 1600(withdrawable version)

Manual operation

Electrical operation

Vertical connectionadapter

Escutcheon

Auxiliary contact

Voltage release


Direct rotaryhandle

Communicationsmodule

Transparent cover

106


2

Installation

Fixed configurationCompact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers may be installed vertically, horizontallyor flat on their back without any derating of characteristics.

Withdrawable configurationCompact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.

Withdrawable Compact NS800H

Mounting on a backplate

Installation, connectionand accessoriesCompact NS630b to 1600

Mounting on railsMounting on a backplate

The withdrawable configuration makes itpossible to:c Extract and/or rapidly replace the

circuit breaker without having to touchconnections;

c Allow for the addition of future circuitsat a later date.

Rear mounting on rails

Device on mounting plate Device on rails

Fixed Compact NS800H

107

2

1

2

8

10

9

7

5

6

4

3

The multifunctional chassis for Compact NS630b to 1600 devices is particularlysuited for incoming circuit breakers. Features include:c Device connection and disconnection through a door, using a crank that can be

stored in the chassisc Three positions (connected, test and disconnected) that are indicated:v Locally by a position indicatorv Remotely by carriage switches (3 for the connected position, 2 for the

disconnected position and 1 for the test position)c Circuit-breaker ON/OFF commands through a switchboard front panel.

LockingThere are extensive locking possibilities:c Chassis locking in connected, disconnected and test positions using three

padlocks and two keylocks, on the switchboard front panelc Door interlock (inhibits door opening with breaker in connected position)c Racking interlock (inhibits racking with door open)c Locking in each of the connected, disconnected and test positions during

device connection or disconnection. Continuation to the next position requirespressing a release button to free the crank.

Other safety functionMismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis withcompatible characteristics.

Connected Test Disconnected Removed

The device may be in one of four positionson the chassis:c Connected position. The power

circuits and auxiliary contacts are allconnected

c Test position. The power circuits aredisconnected. The auxiliary contactsare still connected and the device canbe operated electrically

c Disconnected position. The powercircuits and auxiliary contacts are alldisconnected, however the device isstill mounted on the chassis. It can beoperated manually (ON, OFF, "push totrip").

c Removed position. All circuits aredisconnected. The device simply restson the chassis rails and can beremoved.

1 mismatch protection2 door interlock3 racking interlock4 keylock locking5 padlock locking6 position indicator7 chassis front plate (accessible with cubicle door closed)8 crank entry9 reset button10 crank storage

108


2

Installation, connectionand accessoriesCompact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)

Types of connection

Front connection

Rear connectionHorizontal Vertical

Simply turn a horizontal rear connector 90° to make it a vertical connector.

Combination of front and rear connections

Compact NS630b to 1600 fixed andwithdrawable devices can be connectedusing:c Horizontal or vertical rear connectionsc Front connectionsc Mixed connectionsc A combination of front and rear

connections.

Note.Compact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently withbare-copper, tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors,requiring no particular treatment.

109

2

BarsFixed, front-connection Compact NS630b to 1600devices are equipped with terminals comprisingcaptive screws for direct connection of bars.Other connection possibilities for bars include

vertical-connection adapters for edgewise bars andspreaders to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm.If the vertical connection adapters are front oriented,then it is mandatory to install the arc chute screen inorder to comply with the safety clearances.

Bare cablesSpecial sets of connectors and terminal shields maybe used to connect up to four 240 mm2 copper oraluminium cables for each phase.

Cables with lugsCable lug adapters are combined with thevertical-connection adapters.

One to four cables with crimped lugs (i 300 mm2)may be connected.

To ensure stability, spacers must be positionedbetween the terminal extensions.

If the cable lug adapters are installed over the top ofthe arc chute chambers, then it is mandatory to installthe arc chute screen in order to comply with the safetyclearances.

Front connection of fixed devices

Vertical-connection adapters

Spreaders.

4-cable connectors

Cable lug adapters

110


2


Rear connection of fixed devices

BarsFixed, rear-connection Compact NS630b to 1600devices equipped with horizontal or vertical connectorsmay be directly connected to flat or edgewise bars,depending on the position of the connectors.Spreaders are available to increase the pole pitch to95 mm.

Cables with lugsCable lug adapters enable connection of one to fourcables with crimped lugs (i 300 mm2).


Spreaders.

Cable lug adapters

111

2

Front connection of withdrawable devices

Bars


Spreaders

Cable lug adapters

Withdrawable, front-connection Compact NS630b to1600 devices are suitable for direct connection of bars.Other connection possibilities for bars includevertical-connection adapters for edgewise bars andspreaders to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm.



112


2


Rear connection of withdrawable devices

BarsWithdrawable, rear-connection Compact NS630b to1600 devices equipped with horizontal or verticalconnectors may be directly connected to flat oredge-wise bars, depending on the position of theconnectors. Spreaders are available to increase thepole pitch to 95 mm.



Cable lug adapters

Spreaders

113

2


Connection shield

Compact NS equipped with connection shield

Safety shutters

Connection shieldMounted on fixed, front-connection devices, this shieldinsulates power-connection points, particularly whencables with lugs are used

Interphase barriersThese barriers are flexible insulated partitions used toreinforce isolation of connection points in installationswith busbars, whether insulated or not.

Barriers are installed vertically between front or rearconnection terminals.

Safety shuttersMounted on the chassis, the safety shuttersautomatically block access to the disconnectingcontact cluster when the device is in the disconnectedor test positions (degree of protection IP 20). Whenthe device is removed from its chassis, no live partsare accessible.

The shutters can be padlocked (padlock not supplied)to:c Prevent connection of the devicec Lock the shutters in the closed position.

Interphase barriers forwithdrawable device, rearconnection

Interphase barriers for fixeddevice, front connection

Interphase barriers for fixeddevice, rear connection

114


2


Connection of electrical auxiliaries

Fixed devicesConnections are made directly to the auxiliaries once the front has been removed.Wires exit the circuit breaker through a knock-out in the top.

Withdrawable devicesAuxiliary circuits are connected to terminal blocks located in the top part of thechassis.The auxiliary terminal block is made up of a fixed and moving part. The two partsare in contact when the device is in the test and connected positions.

Manually operated device

Electrically operated device

Withdrawable device

OF1

OF2

OF3

SD

COM MNorMX

rotary handle

MNouMXCOM

MNouMXCOM

MNorMX

115

2

Carriage switches for connected (CE), disconnected (CD) andtest (CT) positions

OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts

All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also availablein "low-level" versions capable of switching very lowloads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electroniccircuits).

Indication contacts

Contacts installed in the deviceChangeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and canthus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.

Functionsc OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contactsc SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:v An overloadv A short-circuitv An earth-leakage fault.v Operation of a voltage releasev Operation of the "push to trip" buttonv Disconnection when the device is ON.Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.c SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:v An overloadv A short-circuitv An earth-leakage fault.Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.c CAF / CAO (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the

rotary handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices(early break) or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing(early make).

Installationc OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different

indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. Thecontacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker.

c CAF / CAO function - the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct orextended).

Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE/CAF/CAO auxiliary contacts


110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -

Connected, disconnected, test position carriage switchesA single type of changeover contact can be mounted optionally on the chassis toindicate, depending on the slot where it is installed:c The connected (CE) positionc The disconnected (CD) position. This position is indicated when the required

clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits is reachedc The test (CT) position. In this position, the power circuits are disconnected and

the auxiliary circuits are connected.

Installationc Contacts for the connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and test (CT) positions

clip into the upper front section of the chassis.

Electrical characteristics of the CE/CD/CT auxiliary contacts


110 V 8 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05220/240 V 8 4 - - 5 2 - -250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03380/440 V 8 3 - - 5 1.5 - -660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -

116


2

Compact NS with an extended rotary handle

Compact NS with a direct rotary handle



Direct rotary handleDegree of protection IP 40, IK 07.The direct rotary handle maintains:c Visibility of and access to trip unit settingsc Suitability for isolationc Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and trippedc Access to the "push to trip" buttonc Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,



Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations:c Motor control centre (MCC) switchboards:v Door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON;v Circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open;c A higher degree of protection (IP 43, IK 07)c Machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP 54, IK 07.

Extended rotary handleDegree of protection IP 55, IK 07.




The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked.

The extended rotary handle is made up of:c A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws)c An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the

same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally.c An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max

distance between the back of circuit breaker and door is 218/605 mm.


117

2

Remote trippingThis function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of ashunt release (MX), or an undervoltage release (MN) or a delayed undervoltagerelease (MN + delay unit).The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by anemergency power OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuitbreaker.

Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function

Voltage releases (MX)When energised, the MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker.A continuous supply of power to the MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF position.

CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24/30- 48/60- 100/130- 200/250- 240/277- 380/480- 500/550

V DC 1- 24/30- 48/60- 100/130- 200/250Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 UnContinuous locking function 0.85 to 1.1 UnConsumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200

hold: 4.5Circuit-breaker response 50 ms±10time at Un

Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltagedrops to a value between 35% and 70% of its rated voltage. If the release is notsupplied, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically.Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuit-breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to85% of its rated value.

CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 - 500/550

V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250Operating opening 0.35 to 0.7 Unthreshold closing 0.85 UnConsumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 - hold: 4.5Circuit-breaker response 90 ms±5time at Un

MN delay unitsTo eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation ofthe MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an externaldelay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustableand non-adjustable.

CharacteristicsPower supply non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250V AC 50/60 Hz /DC adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un

closing 0.85 UnConsumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 - hold: 4.5Circuit-breaker response adjustable 0.5s - 0.9s - 1.5s - 3stime at Un non-adjustable 0.25s

openingorder

D2

D1

MN

Manually operated circuit breakers may beequipped with an MX shunt release, an MNundervoltage release or a delayedundervoltage release (MN + delay unit).Electrically operated circuit breakers areequipped as standard with a remoteoperating mechanism to remotely openor close the circuit breaker. An MX shuntrelease or an MN undervoltage release(instantaneous or delayed) may beadded.

MX voltage release

MN

D2

D1

10 12

3 6

ordre dedéclenchementretardé

ordre dedéclenchementinstantané

retardateur

C2

C1

MX

openingorder

118


2

Electrically operated circuit breakerThe motor mechanism module is used to remotely open and close the circuitbreaker. It is made up of a spring-charging motor equipped with an opening releaseand a closing release.

An electrical operation function is generally combined with:c Device ON/OFF indication (OF)c "Fault-trip" indication (SDE).

Wiring diagram of an analogue electrical operation solution

Wiring diagram of a digital electrical operation solution


Electrically operated Compact NS circuit breaker

Electrically operated circuit breakers areequipped as standard with a motormechanism module.Two solutions are available for electricaloperation:c An analogue solutionc A digital solution with the COM

communication option.

A2 B4

A1

A4

OF

COM

SDE

closingorder

openingorder

supervisor

remote-operatingmechanism

12 14

11

OF1

82 84

81

SDE

B4

A1

A2A4

closedopenfaultclosingorder

openingorder

electricaloperation

In the event of simultaneous opening and closing orders, themechanism discharges without any movement of the maincontacts.

In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, thestandard electrical operation solution provides an anti-pumping function by blocking the main contacts in openposition.

119

2

Spring-charging motorPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277- 380/415 - 400/440 - 480

V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 UnConsumption (VA or W) 180Motor overcurrent 2 to 3 In for 0.1 secondCharging time maximum 4 secondsOperating frequency maximum 3 cycles per minute

Electrical closing orderThe release remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is charged.Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an MX release (seeabove), except that the operating threshold is from 0.85 to 1.1 Un and thecircuit-breaker response time at Un is 60 ms ± 10.The Compact NS electrical operation function can be used to implement asynchro-coupling system.

Electrical opening orderThe release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when energised. The supplycan be maintained or automatically disconnected.Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an MX release (seeabove).

120


2

Toggle locked by removablepadlocking device

Locking on manually operated devicesLocking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2.Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diametersranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).


Toggle lock in OFF position padlock removable devicelock in OFF or ON padlock fixed deviceposition

Direct rotary handle lock in padlockc OFF position keylock lockingc OFF or ON position device + keylock

CNOMO direct rotary handle lock in padlockc OFF position keylock lockingc OFF or ON position device + keylock

Extended rotary handle lock in OFF position, padlockdoor opening prevented keylock keylock

Locking in ON position does not prevent the device from tripping in the event of a fault orremote tripping order.


Rotary handle locked by akeylock

121

2

Locking on electrically operated devices

Pushbutton lockingThe transparent cover blocks access to the pushbuttons used to open and closethe device.It is possible to independently lock the opening OFF button and the closing ONbutton.

The pushbuttons may be locked using either:c Three padlocks (not supplied)c Lead sealc Two screws.

Device locking in the OFF positionThe circuit breaker is locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining theopening pushbutton pressed down:c Using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied)c Using a keylock (supplied).

Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks).The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations:c One keylockc One keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied

separately for interlocking with another device.

A locking kit (without lock) is available for installation of a keylock (Ronis, Profalux,Kirk or Castell).

Pushbutton locking using apadlock

Access to pushbuttonsprotected by transparentcover

OFF position locking using akeylock and padlocks

1 reset of mechanicaltrip indicator

2 OFF pushbutton3 OFF position locking4 ON pushbutton5 springs charged indication6 pushbutton locking7 contact position indication8 operation counter

2

8

7

6

5

3

14

OFF position locking usingpadlocks

122


2


Chassis locking

Disconnected position lockingMounted on the chassis and accessible with the door closed, these devices lockthe circuit breaker in the disconnected position in two manners:c Using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied)c Using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available.

Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options:c One keylockc One keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied

separately, using the same key, for interlocking with another devicec One (or two) keylocks mounted on the device + one (or two) identical keylocks

supplied separately, for interlocking with another device.

A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks(Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell).

Connected, disconnected and test position lockingThe connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by an indicator.The racking crank blocks when the exact position is obtained.A release button is used to free it.

On request, the disconnected position locking system may be modified to lock thecircuit breaker in any of the three positions, connected, disconnected and test.

Door interlockMounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening ofthe cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in connected or test position. It thebreaker is put in the connected position with the door open, the door may be closedwithout having to disconnect the circuit breaker.

Racking interlockThis device prevents insertion of the crank when the cubicle door is open (devicecannot be connected).

Mismatch protectionMismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis withcompatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and oneon the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user mayselect.

1

2

8

10

9

7

5

6

4

3

1 mismatch protection2 door interlock3 racking interlock4 keylock locking5 padlock locking6 position indicator7 chassis front plate

(accessible with cubicledoor closed)

8 crank entry9 reset button10 crank storage

Disconnected positionlocking by padlocks

Disconnected positionlocking by keylocks

Door interlock

Racking interlock

Mismatch protection

123

2

Other accessories

Auxiliary terminal shield (CB)Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to theterminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.

Operation counter (CDM)The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on thefront panel. It is compatible with electrically operated devices.

Escutcheon (CDP)Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increasesthe degree of protection to IP 40. It is available in fixed and withdrawable versions.

Transparent cover (CCP) for escutcheonOptional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and securedby a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP 54 and the degree ofprotection against mechanical impacts to IK 10. It may be used for withdrawabledevices only.

Blanking plate (OP) for escutcheonUsed with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cutout of a cubicle not yetequipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed andwithdrawable devices.

Auxiliary terminal shield

Operation counter

Escutcheon

Transparent cover

Blanking plate

124


2

Installation, connectionand accessoriesCompact NS1600b to 3200 (fixed version)

Auxiliarycontact

Voltagerelease

Communicationmodule

Circuit breakerNS1600b / 2500A

Circuit breakerNS3200



125

2

Installation

Fixed circuit breakersCompact NS1600b to 3200 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.

Connection

Front connectionNS1600 to 2500 NS3200

BarsBars may be directly connected to the terminals of Compact NS1600b to 3200circuit breakers.

NS1600b to 2500

NS1600b to 2500 with connection for vertical-connection adapters or NS3200

Mounting on railsFixed Compact NS

126


2


Indication contacts

Contacts installed in the deviceChangeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and canthus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.

Functionsc OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contactsc SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:v An overloadv A short-circuitv An earth-leakage faultv Operation of a voltage releasev Operation of the "push to trip" buttonReturns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.c SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:v An overloadv A short-circuitv An earth-leakage fault.Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.

Installationc OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different

indication functions, depending on the position where it is inserted in thedevice. The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker.

Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE auxiliary contacts

Contacts Standard Low levelRated thermal current (A) 6 5Minimum load 10 mA at 24 V 1 mA at 4 VUtilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2

110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -

OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts

All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also availablein "low-level" versions capable of switching very lowloads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electroniccircuits).

127

2

Remote trippingThis function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of ashunt release (MX), or an undervoltage release (MN) or a delayed undervoltagerelease (MN + delay unit).The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by anemergency power OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuitbreaker.

Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function

Voltage releases (MX)When energised, the MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker.A continuous supply of power to the MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF position.

CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24/30- 48/60- 100/130- 200/250- 240/277- 380/480- 500/550

V DC 1- 24/30- 48/60- 100/130- 200/250Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 UnContinuous locking function 0.85 to 1.1 UnConsumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200

hold: 4.5Circuit-breaker response 50 ms±10time at Un

Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltagedrops to a value between 35% and 70% of its rated voltage. If the release is notsupplied, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically.Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts.Circuit-breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the releasereturns to 85% of its rated value.

CharacteristicsPower supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 - 500/550

V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250Operating opening 0.35 to 0.7 Unthreshold closing 0.85 UnConsumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 - hold: 4.5Circuit-breaker response 90 ms±5time at Un

MN delay unitsTo eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation ofthe MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an externaldelay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustableand non-adjustable.

CharacteristicsPower supply non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250V AC 50/60 Hz /DC adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un

closing 0.85 UnConsumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 - hold: 4.5Circuit-breaker response adjustable 0.5s - 0.9s - 1.5s - 3stime at Un non-adjustable 0.25s

Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuitbreakers may be equipped with an MXshunt release, an MN undervoltagerelease or a delayed undervoltage release(MN + delay unit).

openingorder

D2

D1

MN

MX voltage release

MN

D2

D1

10 12

3 6

ordre dedéclenchementretardé

ordre dedéclenchementinstantané

retardateur

C2

C1

MX

openingorder

128


2

Device lockingLocking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2.Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diametersranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).


Toggle lock in OFF position padlock removable devicelock in OFF or ON padlock fixed deviceposition


Compact NS with toggle locked using a removable device andpadlocks

Compact NS with toggle locked using a fixed device andpadlocks

129

2

Test equipment

Compact NS100 to 630test equipment for STR electronic trip units

Mini test kitThe mini test kit is a portable unit requiring no external power supply, used to checkoperation of the electronic trip unit and circuit-breaker tripping.It connects to the test connector on the front of the circuit breaker.Required power source: five 9 V alkaline batteries (not supplied).

Portable test kitThe portable test kit is used to check all aspects of the protection functions:c Long time protectionc Short time protectionc Instantaneous protectionc Earth-fault protection.Required power source: 110 or 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

Compact NS630b to 3200test equipment for Micrologic control units

Mini test kitThe autonomous hand-held mini test kit may be used to:c Check operation of the control unit and the tripping and pole-opening system

by sending a signal simulating a short-circuitc Supply power to the control units for settings via the keypad when the

circuit-breaker is open (Micrologic P and H control units).Required power source: standard LR6-AA battery.

Portable test kitThe portable test kit is available in two versions:c The autonomous version with built-in keypad and displayc The complete version controlled by a PC.

The autonomous version may be used to check:c The mechanical operation of the circuit breakerc The electrical continuity of the connection between the circuit breaker and the

control unitc Operation of the control unit:v Display of settingsv Operating tests on the ASIC electronic componentv Automatic and manual tests on protection functionsv Test on the zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) functionv Inhibition of the earth-fault protectionv Inhibition of the thermal memory.

The complete version controlled by a PC offers in addition:c Comparison of the real tripping curve with the catalogue curves available

on the PCc Reset of the M2C / M6C contacts and indicationsc Reading and modification of settings and countersc Reading of histories and logsc Waveform capturec Analysis of harmonics.

Note.These test kits are identical for all Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers andall Masterpact NW circuit breakers.

Mini test kit Portable test kit

Portable test kit

130

3

131

3

Installation recommendations

Presentation 8Functions and characteristics 16

Operating conditions 132Installation in switchboardsPower supply and weights 133Safety clearances and minimum distances 134Installation example 136

Door interlock for Compact NS630b to 1600 137Connection of MN and MX voltage releases 138for Compact NS630b to 3200Power connections for Compact NS80H-MA 139NSC100NPower connections for Compact NS100 to 630Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs 140Connection of bare cables 141Insulation of live parts 142

Power connections for Compact NS630b to 3200 143Sizing of bars 145Recommended drilling dimensions 147

Temperature derating 150Power dissipation / Resistance 152

Dimensions 155Connection 193Electrical diagrams 209Additional characteristics 237Catalogue numbers 251More information about Schneider Electric 292

Compact NS

132

Installationrecommendations

3

Altitude deratingAltitude does not significantly affect circuit-breaker characteristics up to 2000 m.Above this altitude, it is necessary to take into account the decrease in the dielectricstrength and cooling capacity of air.The following table gives the corrections to be applied for altitudes above 2000metres. The breaking capacities remain unchanged.

Compact NS80 to 630

Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000Dielectric resistance voltage (V) 3000 2500 2100 1800Average insulation level (V) 750 700 600 500Maximum utilisation voltage (V) 690 550 480 420Average thermal current (A) at 40 °C 1 x In 0.96 x In 0.93 x In 0.9 x In


Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000Dielectric resistance voltage (V) 3500 3150 2500 2100Average insulation level (V) 750 750 700 600Maximum utilisation voltage (V) 690 590 520 460Average thermal current (A) at 40 °C 1 x In 0.99 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In

VibrationsCompact NS devices resist electromagnetic or mechanical vibrations.Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 68-2-6 for the levels requiredby merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd’s, etc.):c 2 13.2 Hz: amplitude ± 1 mmc 13.2 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage tomechanical parts.

Electromagnetic disturbancesCompact NS devices are protected against:c Overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbancesc Overvoltages caused by an atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-

system outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system)c Devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)c Electrostatic discharges produced by users.

Compact NS devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibilitytests (EMC) defined by the following international standards:c IEC 60947-2, appendix Fc IEC 60947-2, appendix B (trip units with Vigi earth-leakage function).

The above tests guarantee that:c No nuisance tripping occursc Tripping times are respected.

Operating conditions

133

3

Installation in switchboardsPower supply and weights

Power supplyCompact NS circuit breakers can be supplied from either the top or the bottomwithout any reduction in performance. This capability facilitates connection wheninstalled in a switchboard.

Weights

Circuit breaker Plug-in Chassis Vigi module Positive contact Motor-mechanismbase indication (Interpact INV) module

NS80H-MA 3P/3D 1.09NSC100N 3P/3D 1 1.5

4P/4D 1.3 1.7NS100N/H 1P/1D 0.5

2P/2D 1.45NS100N 3P/2D 1.79 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2NS100N/H/L 3P/3D 2.05 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2

4P/4D 2.57 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2NS160N/H 1P/1D 0.5

2P/2D 1.45NS160N 3P/2D 1.85 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2NS160N/H/L 3P/3D 2.10 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2

4P/4D 2.58 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2NS250N 3P/2D 1.94 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2NS250N/H/L 3P/3D 2.2 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2

4P/4D 2.78 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2NS400/630N/H/L 3P/3D 6.19 2.4 2.2 2.8 4.6 2.8

4P/4D 8.13 2.8 2.2 3 4.9 2.8NS630b to 1600 3P 14 14manual operation 4P 18 18NS630b to 1600 3P 14 16electrical operation 4P 18 21NS1600b to 3200 3P 24

4P 36

The table above presents the weights (in kg) of the circuit breakers and the main accessories, which must be summed to obtain the total weight of completeconfigurations.

134


3

F

FB

frontpanel if F < 8 mm : an

insulating screenis mandatory

Installation in switchboardsSafety clearancesand minimum distances

Dimensions (mm) Insulation, insulated bars Bare sheetmetal

or painted sheetmetal

Compact circuit breaker C1 D1 D2 C2 D1 D2 A1 (2) A2 (3) BNS80H-MA U i 440 V 0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0NSC100N U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 35 35 0 20 0

U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 35 35 0 40 0NS100-250 U i 440 V 0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0

U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 35 35 0 20 0U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 35 35 0 40 0

NS400-630 U i 440 V 0 30 30 5 60 60 0 10 0U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 60 60 0 20 0U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 100 100 0 40 0

(1) Distance must be doubled with interphase barriers.(2) For Compact NS with long or short terminal shields.(3) For Compact NS without terminal shields.

The mandatory distances when installing Compact NS circuit breakers are calculated from the device case, not taking into account the terminal shields or theinterphase barriers.

Compact NS80 to 630When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must bemaintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection devicesinstalled nearby. These distances, which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity,are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947-2.

If installation conformity is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to:c Use insulated bars for circuit-breaker connectionsc Block off the busbars using insulating screens.

For Compact NS80 to 630 devices, terminal shields, interphase barriers and theinsulation kit are recommended and may be mandatory depending on the utilisationvoltage and the type of installation (fixed, withdrawable). (See page 142.)

Minimal distance between two adjacent circuit breakers

Minimal distance between Minimal distance betweenthe circuit breaker and top, the circuit breakerbottom or side panels and front or rear panels

D1

D2 C1C2

bare or painted sheetmetal;insulation or insulated bars

135

3

40

B = 0

40

insulation

insulating kit

Connection using cables with lugs or busbars, F = 100.Connection using bare cables, F = 150.

Insulating kit is standard.

F30

30F

side panel

bare or paintedsheetmetal;insulation orinsulated bars

F146,5

A (*)

Compact NS630b to 3200 (fixed devices)A (*) BB

F

40180

AB B

C C

Insulated parts Metal parts Live partsNS630b to 1600

A 0 0 180B 0 0 60

NS1600b to 2500A 0 30 180B 0 0 60

NS3200A 0 30 180B 0 30 60

Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable devices)

Insulated parts Metal parts Live partsA 0 0 30B 10 10 60C 0 0 90

F Datum

Fixed Compact NS400 1000 V AC, front connectionPower supply from the top or bottom. Connection by cables or busbars.

An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required toremove the arc chutes.

136


3

A A A A

painted sheetmetal

Minimum dimensions (mm) A

Compact circuit breakerNS80H-MA/NSC100N 0NS100-630 0NS630b-1600 250NS1600b-3200 300

Connection by cableswith lugs, devices withterminal shields.

Connection by insulatedbars, devices withterminal shields.

Rear connection or plug-inbase, devices with terminalshields.

Direct connection bybare cables, deviceswith terminal shields.

Installation in switchboardsInstallation example

137

3

Door interlockfor Compact NS630b to 1600

Note. The door interlock may be mounted on either the leftor right-hand side of the chassis.

F Datum

Device in the connected or test positionsDoor locked

Device in the disconnected positionDoor not locked

Dimensions (mm)Type (1) (2)

NS630b to 1600 (3P) 135 168NS630b to 1600 (4P) 205 168

61

11

2

4

(2) (1)

Y

5

F

porte

23

Mounted on the left or right-hand side of the chassis,this locking device prevents opening of the door if thecircuit breaker is in the connected or test positions. Ifthe circuit breaker was connected with the door open,the door may be closed without having to disconnectthe circuit breaker.

138


3

Connection of MN and MXvoltage releases forCompact NS630b to 3200

Release wiringDuring pick-up, the power drawn is approximately 150 to 200 VA. For low supplyvoltages (12, 24, 48 V), the maximum cable length therefore depends on thesupply voltage and the size of the cables.

Indicative values for maximum wire lengths (in metres)12 V 24 V 48 V

2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2

MN 100 % U source – – 58 35 280 16585 % U source – – 16 10 75 45

MX 100 % U source 21 12 115 70 550 33085 % U source 10 6 75 44 350 210

Note. The lengths mentioned are for each of the two supply wires.

139

3

Standard With distributiondevice connector

L (mm) 18 i 10S (mm2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 70 rigid 1.5 to 16 rigid

1.5 to 50 flexible 1.5 to 10 flexible (1)Tightening 5 2torque (Nm)

(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm 2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.

L

S

Power connections forCompact NS80H-MA, NSC100N

Distribution connector

140


3

NS100 NS160/250 NS400/630Bars L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 32

I (mm) d + 10 d + 10 d + 15d (mm) i 10 i 10 i 15e (mm) i 6 i 6 3 i e i 10Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5

Lugs L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 32Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5

Tightening torque (Nm) (1) 10 15 50Tightening torque (Nm) (2) 5 5 20

(1) Tightening torque for lugs or bars on the circuit breaker(2) Tightening torque for rear connections or terminal extensions on plug-in base

Connections with accessories

NS100 to 250Pole pitch

Without spreaders 35 mmWith spreaders 45 mm

Dimensions With spreaders or terminal extensionsNS100 NS160/250

Bars L (mm) i 25 i 25l (mm) 20 i I i 25 20 i I i 25d (mm) i 10 i 10e (mm) i 6 i 6Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5

Lugs L (mm) i 25 i 25Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5

Tighten. (Nm) 10 (1), 5 (2) 15 (1), 5 (2)torque

(1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker(2) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base

Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with flexibleinterphase barriers.

NS400 and 630Pole pitch

Without spreaders 45 mmWith spreaders 52.5 ou 70 mm

Dimensions With spreaders With terminal extensionsBars L (mm) i 40 i 32

l (mm) d + 15 30 i I i 34d (mm) i 20 i 15e (mm) 3 i e i 10 3 i e i 10Ø (mm) 12,5 10,5

Lugs L (mm) i 40 i 32Ø (mm) 12,5 10,5

Tighten. (Nm) 50 (1), 20 (2) 50 (1), 20 (2)torque

(1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker(2) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base

Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with flexibleinterphase barriers.

L

Ø

e

dl

400

L

L

Ø

e

dl

400

L

Where U > 600 V, the mandatory insulation kit meansseparate spreaders cannot be used. The one-piecespreader must be used.

L

Ø

e

dl

400

L

Power connections forCompact NS100 to 630Connection of insulated bars orcables with lugs

NS100 to 250SpreaderSeparate parts One-piece spreaderTinned copper

Straight terminalextensionsTinned copper.

Right-angle terminalextensionsTinned copper.Upstream side.

NS400 and 600Separate spreaders with 52.5 and 70 mm polepitchesTinned copper Where U > 600 V,

use of the 52.5 mmspreaders requires aspecific insulation kit.The 70 mm spreadersmay not be used.

Edgewise terminalextensionTinned copper

Right-angle terminalextensions

Tinned copperUpstream side

Close-up view of two cableswith lugs.

141

3

NS100 to 250

1-cable connector Steel Aluminiumi 160A i 250A

L (mm) 20 20S (mm2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 95 (1) 10…16 25…35 50…185Tightening torque (Nm) 12 15 20 26

6-cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium)L (mm) 15 or 30S (mm2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 6 (1) 8 to 35Tightening torque (Nm) 4 6

Polybloc distribution block (6 or 9 cables)L (mm) 12S (mm2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 10

(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.

NS400 and 630

1-cable connector 2-cable connector1 cable 2 cables

L (mm) 20 30 or 60S (mm2) Cu / Al 35 to 300 2 x 85 to 2 x 240

rigid / flexible rigid / flexibleTightening torque (Nm) 31 31

L

S

L

S

1-cable connector Distribution connector Polybloc distribution block

1-cable connector 2-cable connector

Connection of bare cables

142


3

Fixed Compact NS, front connectionsNS100/250N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L

U < 500 V Interphase barriers Interphase barriersor long terminal or long terminalshields recommended. shields recommended.Insulated bars Insulated barsare mandatory. are mandatory.

500 V i U i 600 V Interphase barriers Interphase barriers Interphase barriersor long terminal or long terminal or long terminalshields are shields are shields aremandatory. mandatory. mandatory.Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated barsare mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory.

U > 600 V Insulation kit Insulation kit Insulation kitand insulated bars and insulated bars and insulated barsare mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory.

The insulation kit is not compatible with:c separate spreaders for Compact NS100 to 250. The one-piece spreader must be usedc separate spreaders (70 mm) for Compact NS400 and 630. For the 52.5 mm spreaders, thereis a specific insulation kit.

Fixed Compact NS, rear connectionsNS100/250N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L

All voltage levels Short terminal shields Short terminal shields Short terminal shieldsrecommended. recommended. recommended.

Withdrawable Compact NS, front and rear connectionsNS100/250N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L

All voltage levels Short terminal shields Short terminal shields Short terminal shieldsare mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory.Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated barsare mandatory. are mandatory are mandatory.

for U u 500 V.

Use of an insulating screen (supplied with the plug-in base) is mandatory.

Power connections forCompact NS100 to 630 (cont.)


143

3

Power connections forCompact NS630b to 3200

Conductor materials and electrodynamic stressesCompact circuit breakers can be connected with bare-copper, tinned-copper andtinned-aluminium conductors (flexible or rigid bars, cables.In the event of a short-circuit, thermal and electrodynamic stresses will be exertedon the conductors. They must therefore be correctly sized and maintained in placeusing supports.Electrical connection points on all types of devices (switch-disconnectors,contactors, circuit breakers, etc.) should not be used for mechanical support.

Ties for flexible bars and cablesThe table below indicates the maximum distance between ties depending on theprospective short-circuit current.The maximum distance between ties attached to the switchboard frame is 400 mm.

Type of tie Width: 4.5 mm Width: 9 mmMaximum load: 22 kg Maximum load: 90 kg

Maximum distance 200 100 50 350 200 100 70 50between ties (mm) (double ties)Short-circuit 10 15 20 20 27 35 45 100current (kA rms)

Note. For cables u 50 mm2, use 9 mm-wide ties.

Connection of barsBars must be adjusted to ensure correct positioning on the terminals before bolting (B)Bars must rest on a support firmly attached to the switchboard frame, such that thecircuit-breaker terminals do not bear any weight (C).Electrodynamic forcesThe first spacer between bars must be positioned within a maximum distance (seetable below) of the connection point to the circuit breaker. This distance iscalculated to resist the electrodynamic stresses exerted between the bars of eachphase during a short-circuit.Maximum distance A between the circuit-breaker connection and the first spacerbetween bars, depending on the short-circuit current

Isc (kA) 30 50 65 80 100 150Distance (mm) 350 300 250 150 150 150

144


3

ConnectionsThe quality of bar connections depends, among other things, on the tighteningtorques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the sameconsequences as under-tightening.The correct tightening torques for the connection of bars to the circuit-breakerterminals are indicated in the table below.The values below are for copper bars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) and steel nuts andbolts (class 8.8).The same values apply to AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars(French standard NFA 02-104 and American National Standard H-35-1).

Examples of bar connections

Tightening torque for barsRated diameter (mm) Drilling (mm) Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (Nm)

diameter with flat or grower with contact or splitwashers washers

10 11 37.5 50

Bar drillingExamples

Insulation distance

Bar bendingBars must be bent according to the table below. A tighter bend may cause cracks.

Dimensions (mm)e radius r

Minimum Recommended

5 5 7.510 15 18 to 20

1 terminal screws, factory tightened to 13 Nm2 circuit-breaker terminal3 bars4 bolt5 washer6 nut

Dimensions (mm)Utilisation voltage X minimum

Ui i 600 V 8 mmUi i 1000 V 14 mm

Power connections forCompact NS630b to 3200

145

3

Sizing of bars

Compact Maximum Ti : 40 °C Ti : 50 °C Ti : 60 °Cservice Number of bars Number of bars Number of barscurrent 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick

NS630b 400 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10NS630b 630 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10NS800 800 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10NS1000 1000 3b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10NS1250 1250 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10

2b.80 x 5 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5NS1600 / 1600b 1400 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10NS1600 / 1600b 1600 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 3b.50 x 10NS2000 1800 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10NS2000 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.63 x 10NS2500 2200 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.80 x 5 2b.100 x 10NS2500 2500 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10NS3200 2800 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10NS3200 3000 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 10NS3200 3200 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10

The following tables are based on the following assumptions:c Maximum permissible temperature of bars is 100 °Cc Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connectionsc Busbars made of copper and not painted.Note.The values presented in the tables are the result of trials and theoretical calculations on thebasis of the assumptions mentioned above.These tables are intended as an aid in designing connections, however, the actual values mustbe confirmed by tests on the installation.

Front or horizontal rear connections

NoteWith Compact NS630b to NS1600, it is recommended to use 50 mm wide bars (see "Recommanded busbars drilling")

146


3 Compact Maximum Ti : 40 °C Ti : 50 °C Ti : 60 °Cservice Number of bars Number of bars Number of barscurrent 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick

NS630b 400 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10NS630b 630 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10NS800 800 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10NS1000 1000 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10NS1250 1250 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10NS1600 1400 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10NS1600 1600 2b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 2b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10

Vertical rear connections

Power connections forCompact NS630b to 3200Sizing of bars

147

3

12,5Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

50

12,5 12,5Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

50

12,5 25,5Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

63

12,515

Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

80

25

15

Ø12 maxi

12,5

32

25

12,5

Ø12 maxi

12,5

40

25

12,5

Ø12 maxi

12,5

50

25

12,5

Ø12 maxi

12,5

63

25

12,5

Ø12 maxi

12,5

80

25

12,5

12,5Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

50

12,5 25,5Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

63

12,512,5Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

50

12,515

Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

80

25

15

Power connections forCompact NS630b to 1600Recommended drilling dimensions

Rear connection Rear connection with spreaders

Vertical rear connection

2 Ø11

25 9,5

44

12,560

12,5

52

5 Ø11

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

15

305282

25

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

5282 15

30

25

52

5 Ø11 5 Ø11

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

15

305282

25

52

25

9,5

44

12,5

60

12,5

2 Ø11

259,5

44

152 vis M10

15

9,525

44

152 vis M10

15

3 Ø11

12,5=25 =

89

15

21

20

10121

15

5 Ø11

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

15

305282

25

52

Front connection Front connection with vertical-connection adapter

Middle left or middle Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader Left or right spreaderright spreader for 4P for 4P for 3P

Top terminal Bottom terminal

148


3

12,5Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

50

12,5 25,5Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

63

12,515

Ø12 maxi

25 12,5

80

25

15

20

20

15 25

60

80

100

25

20

45

12,5

25

25

25

60

4 Ø11

20

20

15 25

60

80

100

25

20

45

12,5

25

25

25

60

4 Ø11

Front connection (NS1600b to 2500)

Power connections forCompact NS1600b to 3200Recommended drilling dimensions

Front connection with vertical-connection adapter (NS1600b to 2500)

Front connection (NS3200)

76 25

15

3 ø11

13

63

ø12 maxi

25

25

25

12,512,5

80

ø12 maxi

25

25

25

12,512,5

100

ø12 maxi

25

25

25

12,512,5

100

ø12 maxi

25

25

25

12,512,5

100

ø12 maxi

25

25

25

12,512,5

100

ø12 maxi

25

25

25

12,512,5

149

3

The values opposite are valid for fixed circuitbreakers equipped with one of the following modules:c Vigi modulec Ammeter modulec Insulation-monitoring modulec Current-transformer module.They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuitbreakers equipped with one of the following modules:c Ammeter modulec Current-transformer module.However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakersequipped with a Vigi module or an insulation-monitoring module, the coefficients in the table belowmust be applied.

Trip unit CoefficientTM16 to TM125 1TM160 to TM250 0.9

Temperature deratingCompact NS devices equippedwith thermal-magnetic trip units

When the ambient temperature is greater than 40 °C, overload-protectioncharacteristics are slightly modified.To determine tripping times using time/current curves, use Ir values correspondingto the thermal setting on the device, corrected as indicated in the tables below.

Single-pole and two-pole Compact NSRating (A) 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 60°C 65 °C 70 °C

16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.825 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 2140 40 39 38 37 36 35 3463 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 5480 80 78 76 74 72 70 68100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136200 200 195 190 185 180 175 170250 250 244 238 231 225 219 213

Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip unitsRating (A) 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 60°C 65 °C 70 °C

16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.825 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 2132 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.540 40 39 38 37 36 35 3450 50 49 48 47 46 45 4463 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 5480 80 78 76 74 72 70 68100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136200 200 195 190 185 180 175 170250 250 244 238 231 225 219 213

150


3

The values opposite are valid for fixed circuitbreakers equipped with one of the following modules:c Vigi modulec Ammeter modulec Insulation-monitoring modulec Current-transformer module.They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuitbreakers equipped with one of the following modules:c Ammeter modulec Current-transformer module.However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakersequipped with a Vigi module or an insulation-monitoring module, the coefficients in the table belowmust be applied.

Circuit breaker Trip unit Coeff.NS100N/H/L STR22SE/GE 40 to 100 1NS160N/H/L STR22SE/GE 40 to 160 1NS250N/H/L STR22SE/GE 100 and 160 1NS250N/H/L STR22SE/GE 250 0.86

The values opposite are valid for fixed or plug-in /withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with one ofthe following modules:c Ammeter modulec Current-transformer module.However, for fixed or plug-in / withdrawable circuitbreakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation-monitoring module, the coefficients in the table belowmust be applied.

Circuit breaker Trip unit Coeff.NS400N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.97

STR23SV and 53SVNS630N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.9

STR23SV and 53SV

Note. To provide the Visu function, Compact NS circuitbreakers, with or without a Vigi module, are combined withINV switch-disconnectors. Tripping values for the selectedcombination are indicated in the Interpact catalogue.

Electronic trip units are not affected by variations in temperature. However, themaximum permissible current in the circuit breaker still depends on the ambienttemperature.

Compact NS100...NS250The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting dependingon the ambient temperature.

NS100N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °CIn: 40 to 160 A no deratingIr max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

NS250N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °CIn: 100 to 160A no deratingIr max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1In: 250A 250 250 250 237.5 237.5 225 225Ir max 1 1 1 0.95 0.95 0.90 0.90

Compact NS400 and NS630The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting dependingon the ambient temperature.

NS400N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °CFixed In: 400A 400 400 400 390 380 370 360

Io/Ir max 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9Plug-in / In: 400 400 390 380 370 360 350 340withdrawable Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85

NS630N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °CFixed In: 630A 630 615 600 585 570 550 535

Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.8 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85Plug-in / In: 570A 570 550 535 520 505 490 475withdrawable Io/Ir max 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85 1/0.83 1/0.8 0.8/0.98 0.8/0.95

Temperature deratingCompact NS devices equipped withelectronic trip units

151

3

Compact NS630b to NS1600 (1)

The table below indicates the maximum rated-current value for each type of connection, depending on the ambient temperature.For mixed connections, use the same derating values as for horizontal connections.

Version Fixed deviceConnection Front or horizontal rear Vertical reartemp. Ti (2) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70

NS630b N/H/L 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630NS800 N/H/L 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800NS1000 N/H/L 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000NS1250 N/H 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1170 1000 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1090NS1600 N/H 1600 1600 1560 1510 1470 1420 1360 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1510 1460

Version Withdrawable deviceConnection Front or horizontal rear Vertical reartemp. Ti (2) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70

NS630b N/H/L 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630NS800 N/H/L 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800NS1000 N/H/L 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 920 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 990NS1250 N/H 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1240 1090 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180NS1600 N/H 1600 1600 1520 1480 1430 1330 1160 1600 1600 1600 1560 1510 1420 1250

Compact NS1600b to 3200Version Fixed deviceConnection Front or horizontal rear Vertical reartemp. Ti (2) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70

NS1600b N/H 1600 1600 1600 1600 1500 1450 1400 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1550 1500NS2000 N/H 2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800 1700 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800NS2500 N/H 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500NS3200 N/H - - - - - - - 3200 3200 3200 3180 3080 2970 2860

(1) For a circuit breaker mounted in horizontal position, the derating to be applied is equivalent to that of a front or horizontal rear connected circuit breaker.(2) Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections.

Temperature deratingCompact NS devices equipped withelectronic trip units

152


3

Power dissipation / ResistanceCompact NS devices equippedwith thermal-magnetic trip units

Compact NSC100NFixed device Additional modules

3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi (N, L3) Vigi (L1, L2)NSC100N 16 15 4 0.06 0.06

20 11.2 4.5 0.1 0.125 8 5 0.16 0.1632 5.4 5.5 0.26 0.2640 3.7 6 0.4 0.450 2.8 7 0.63 0.6363 2 8 1 170 2 10 1.3 1.380 1.4 9 1.6 1.6100 1 10 2.5 2.5

NSC100NA 100 0.6 6 2.5 2.5

Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip unitsFixed device Additional modules

3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- AmmeterTransfo.

(N, L3) (L1, L2) drawablemodule moduleNS100N/H/L 16 11.42 2.92 0 0 0 0 0

25 6.42 4.01 0 0 0.1 0 032 3.94 4.03 0.06 0.03 0.15 0.1 0.140 3.42 5.47 0.10 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.150 1.64 4.11 0.15 0.08 0.3 0.1 0.163 2.17 8.61 0.3 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.180 1.37 8.77 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1100 0.88 8.8 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2

NS160N/H/L 80 1.26 8.06 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1100 0.77 7.7 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2125 0.69 10.78 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0.3160 0.55 13.95 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5

NS250N/H/L 125 0.61 9.45 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0.3160 0.46 11.78 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5200 0.39 15.4 2.8 1.4 4 0.8 0.8250 0.3 18.75 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3

Compact NS80 and NS100 to 630 equipped with MA trip unitsFixed device Additional modules

3 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- AmmeterTransfo.

(N, L3) (L1, L2) drawablemodule moduleNS80H 1.5 93.3 0.21

2.5 89.6 0.566.3 75.6 312.5 12.8 225 2.24 1.450 1.04 2.680 0.94 6.02

NS100N/H/L 2.5 148.42 0.93 0 0 0 0 06.3 99.02 3.93 0 0 0 0 012.5 4.05 0.63 0 0 0 0 025 1.66 1.04 0 0 0.1 0 050 0.67 1.66 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.1100 0.52 5.2 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2

NS160N/H/L 150 0.38 8.55 1.35 0.68 2.6 0.45 0.45NS250N/H/L 220 0.3 14.52 2.9 1.45 4.89 0.97 0.97NS400H/L 320 0.12 12.29 3.2 1.6 6.14 1.54 1.54NS630H/L 500 0.1 25 13.99 7 15 3.75 3.75

Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS100 to 160Fixed device

1/2 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/poleNS100N/H 16 11.3 2.89

20 6.3 2.5230 2.9 2.6140 2.9 4.6450 1.4 3.563 1.4 5.5680 1.25 8100 0.76 7.6

NS160N/H 125 0.63 9.84160 0.48 12.29

Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W).Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (mΩ).Total power dissipation is the value measured at In,50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker(values above power P = 3RI2).

153

3

Compact NS100 to NS630Fixed device Additional modules

3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- AmmeterTransfo.

(N, L3) (L1, L2) drawablemodule moduleNS100N/H/L 40 0.84 1.34 0.1 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1

100 0.468 4.68 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2NS160N/H/L 40 0.73 1.17 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1

100 0.36 3.58 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2160 0.36 9.16 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5

NS250N/H/L 100 0.27 2.73 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.2 0.2250 0.28 17.56 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3

NS400N/H/L 400 0.12 19.2 3.2 1.6 9.6 2.4 2.4NS630N/H/L 630 (1) 0.1 39.69 6.5 3.25 19.49 5.95 5.95

(1) The dissipation values for the Vigi modules and withdrawable circuit breakers are givenfor 570 A

Compact NS630b to 1600Version Fixed device

Dissipated power Input/output resistance

NS630b N/H/L 30/45 0.026/0.039NS800 N/H/L 45/60 0.026/0.039NS1000 N/H/L 65/100 0.026/0.039NS1250 N/H 130 0.026NS1600 N/H 220 0.026

Version Withdrawable device


NS630 N/H/L 55/115 0.05NS800 N/H/L 90/120 0.05NS1000 N/H/L 150/230 0.05NS1250 N/H 250 0.036NS1600 N/H 460 0.036

Compact NS1600b à 3200Version Fixed device


NS1600b N/H 250 0.019NS2000 N/H 250 0.013NS2500 N/H 300 0.008NS3200 N/H 680 0.008

Power dissipation / ResistanceCompact NS devices equippedwith electronic trip units

Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W).Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (mΩ)(measured cold). Total power dissipation is the valuemeasured at In, 50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker (values above power P = 3RI2).

154

4

155

4

Dimensions

Presentation 8Functions and characteristics 16Installation recommendations 131

Compact NS80H-MA 156Compact NSC100 158Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 160Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 162Compact NS100 to 630 164(plug-in and withdrawable versions)Vigicompact NS100 to 630 166(plug-in and withdrawable versions)Compact NS100 to 250 168(single-pole and two-pole versions)Motor-mechanism module for Compact NS100 to 630 170Rotary handle for Compact NS100 to 630 172Indication and measurement modules 174for Compact NS100 to 630Front accessories for Compact NS100 to 630 176Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version)Dimensions 178Mountings 179Front-panel cutouts 180Rotary handle 181

Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version)Dimensions, mounting and cutouts 182Rotary handle 183

Compact NS1600b to 3200 (fixed version)Dimensions 184

Compact NS630b to 3200External modules 186

Accessories 190

Connection 193Electrical diagrams 209Additional characteristics 237Catalogue numbers 251More information about Schneider Electric 292

Compact NS

156

Dimensions

4

Compact NS80H-MA

MountingOn backplate On rails

Dimensions

X

Y

3015

48,5

100

∅4

X

Y

3015

48,5

100

≤ 32

∅4

100

X

Z

64,5708084

60

120

103

206

X

Y

9045

(a)

(a) long terminal shields

Front-panel cutoutsCutout A Cutout B Cutout C

46

30

X

Y

68,5

92

30

X

Y

68,5

14,5

26

X

Y

60,5

29

X

Z

A

B/C

7181

157

4

Standard direct rotary handleFront-panel cutout

Extended rotary handleFront-panel cutout

43

30

X

Y

68,5

86

X

Z85

OOFF

ONI

tripped

60°

60° X

Y

90

4580

7,5

4,2

47,5

28,5

Z

82,5112

65,5

Y

X

7,545°

∅4,2

∅50

4,2

3672Y

X

7537,5

7,5

75

37,5

4,2

60°

60°

ZL ( )

mini 175maxi 590

shaft length = L _ 109

MCC direct rotary handleFront-panel cutout

Y

X

7,5

12069,2

4,2

60

120

Y

X

10051,7

45,8

100

116 ± 2

1 to 3 maxi

∆

hNote.Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in theenclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the doorhinge.

158

Dimensions

4

Compact NSC100

Dimensions

Compact NSC1003 poles 4 poles

Vigicompact NSC3 poles 4 poles

100

X

708084

60

120

103

206

Z

15

90

45

X

90

Y

(a)

X

12045

(a)

Y

100

X

708084

60

120

103

206

Z

15

90

101,2

X

21045

Y

(a)

X

24075

(a)

Y

(a) long terminal shields

(a) long terminal shields.

159

4

mini 122maxi 147Z

83

X

Note.Centre line X indicates the centre of the mounting rail.

Y

X

75

37,5

75

37,5

60°

60°

5

3

Y

X

45°

Ø4,2

Ø50

3672

5

3

Extended rotary handleFront-panel cutout

160

Dimensions

4

Compact NS100 to 630(fixed version)

Dimensions2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles

X

Y

L1L

(a)(b)(c)

X

Y

L2L

H

Z

H1

H2

H3 H5 H7

H4 H6

P1P2P4

Mounting

On backplate2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles

K

G

G1

K1 K1K1

G4

G5X

Y

∅T

∅T4 (d)

K

K1 K1 K1

X

Y

K2

On rails2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles

Y

X

K1

G

G1

∅T

U (e) K

Y

X

K2K

Z

G48

G47

G49

G51G50

(d) for rear connection only. For two-pole circuit breakers,the centre hole is not necessary.

On DIN rail with adapter plate

(a) short terminal shields.(b) long terminal shields(available for spreaders onNS400 to 630, pitch 52.5 :L1 = 157.5 mm,L2 = 210 mm).(c) interphase barriers.

161

4

Front-panel cutouts

Fixed or plug-in circuit breakerCutout A Cutout B Cutout C

P5P6

B/C

Z

X

Y

C2

C3X

Y

C2

C3

R2R4(3P)R5(4P)

X

Y

C

C1

RR1

With escutcheon With toggle cover

P6

Z

X

Y

C6

C7

R6R7

C20

C21X

R13R12

Y

Dimensions (mm)Type C C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 C20 C21 G G1 G4

NS100/160/250N/H/L 29 76 54 108 43 104 34 86 62.5 125 70NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 92.5 184 56.5 146 46.5 126 100 200 113.5

Type G5 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 H H1 H2 H3 H4NS100/160/250N/H/L 140 95 75 13.5 23 17.5 80.5 161 94 188 160.5NS400/630N/H/L 227 127.5 255 142.5 285 240

Type H5 H6 H7 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 P1 P2NS100/160/250N/H/L 321 178.5 357 17.5 35 70 52.5 105 140 81 86NS400/630N/H/L 480 237 474 22.5 45 90 70 140 185 95.5 110

Type P4 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R12NS100/160/250N/H/L 111(1) 83 88 14.5 29 54 108 143 29 58 43NS400/630N/H/L 168 107 112 31.5 63 71.5 143 188 46.5 93 63

(1) : P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.

Type R13 ØT ØT4 U(e)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 86 6 22 ≤ 32NS400/630N/H/L 126 6 32 ≤ 32

(e) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).

∆

hNota :Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in theenclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the doorhinge.

162

Dimensions

4

Vigicompact NS100 to 630(fixed version)

Dimensions2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles

H8

H9

H10

H11 H13 H15

H12 H14

P1P2P4Z

X

Y

L1L

(a)(b)(c)

X

Y

L2L

Mounting


G6

G7

K1 K1K1

G

K

G1

G8

G9X

Y

∅T

∅T4 (d)

K1 K1 K1K2

K

X

Y


Y

X

KK1

G

G1

G6

G7

∅T

U (e)

Y

X

KK2

(a) short terminal shields(b) long terminal shields(c) interphase barriers


163

4

Front-panel cutouts

Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker

Cutout A Cutout B

C

C1

C5

C4

R28Y

X

R26

R1R

C2

C3

X

Y

R4 (3P)R5 (4P)

R2R26

R28

P5P6

B

Z

With escutcheons

Note.Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in theenclosure where u100 + (h x 5) with respect to the doorhinge.

P6Z

Dimensions (mm)Type C C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C18 C19 C20 C21 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9

NS100/160/250N/H/L 29 76 130 184 86 37 43 104 71 68 34 86 62.5 125 137.5 200 145 215NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 192 276 147.5 37 56.5 146 132 68 46.5 126 100 200 200 300 213.5 327

Type H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 P1 P2 P4 P5NS100/160/250N/H/L 155.5 236 169 263 235.5 396 253.5 432 17.5 35 70 52.5 105 140 81 86 111(1) 83NS400/630N/H/L 227.5 355 242.5 385 340 580 337 574 22.5 45 90 70 140 185 95.5 110 168 107

(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.

Type P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R11 R12 R13 R26 R27 ØT ØT4 U(e)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 88 14.5 29 54 108 143 29 58 58 43 86 14.5 29 6 22 ≤ 32NS400/630N/H/L 112 31.5 29 71.5 143 188 46.5 93 58 63 126 32 47 6 32 ≤ 32

(e) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).

X

Y

C18

C7

R27R11

C19

C6

R6R7

∆

h

164

Dimensions

4

(*) short terminal shields are mandatory.

Nota :Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in theenclosure where u100 + (h x 5) with respect to the doorhinge.

Compact NS100 to 630(plug-in and withdrawable versions)

(*)

Y

X

L10

L6L9

(*)

Y

X

L8

L6L7

DimensionsPlug-in base 2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles

(*)

N M

H16

P4P9

P7

H17

Z

P8

Y

X

K20K21

G20

G21

∅T

U

Chassis 2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles

N

Z

H19

P7

P9P4

P2 P12

X

H18

P8

MountingThrough panel M (plug-in base) Through panel M (chassis)2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P

K

G10

G11

K1

G12

G13

K11K12

X

Y∅T

KK2

K11K13

X

Y

K

G10

G11

K1

G12

G13

K5K6

X

Y∅T

KK2

K5K7

X

Y

On rails (plug-in base or chassis)2P, 3P 4P

(*)

LL2

K1 K1

X

Y

G10

G11

L1L

X

K1

Y

Y

X

K20K22

165

4

On backplate N (plug-in base or chassis)Front connection (insulating screen is mandatory between the backplate and the base, supplied with the base)

2P, 3P 4P

H20

Z

H21

P33P32

H22

H23

KK2

X

Y

Interior rear connection Exterior rear connection2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P

K2

X

Y

K K

K1K1 K1

K2

X

YK1K1 K1

K KK

G14

G15

K1

G17

K1

X

Y∅T

K

K1

G16

∅T6

G14

G15

K1

X

Y

∅T

K K

K1K1

G18

G19

∅T5

Front-panel cutoutsPlug-in base Chassis with protection collar and escutcheons

P44Z

Y

C17

C11

R8R9

X

Dimensions (mm)Type C11 C17 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24

NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 42.5 95 190 87 174 77.5 155 66 132 82 164 37.5 75 111 222 190NS400/630N/H/L 155 56 150 300 137 274 125 250 101 202 126 252 75 150 170.5 341 283.5

Type G25 G26 G27 H16 H17 H18 H19 K K1 K2 K5 K6 K7 K11 K12 K13 K20NS100/160/250N/H/L 380 208 416 102.5 205 103.5 210 17.5 35 70 54.5 109 144 74 148 183 35NS400/630N/H/L 567 318.5 637 157.5 315 140 280 22.5 45 90 71.5 143 188 91.5 183 228 50

Type K21 K22 L L1 L2 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 P2 P4 P7 P8 P9 P10 P12NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 105 52.5 105 140 92.5 185 216 220 251 86 111(1) 27 45 75 64 32NS400/630N/H/L 100 145 70 140 185 110 220 250 265 295 110 168 27 45 100 86 32

Type P44 R8 R9 U(2) ØT ØT5 ØT6NS100/160/250N/H/L 123 74 148 ≤ 32 6 24 30NS400/630N/H/L 147 90 180 ≤ 32 6 33 33

(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L(2) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).

166

Dimensions

4

Vigicompact NS100 to 630(plug-in and withdrawable versions)

Dimensions

Plug-in base2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles

L1L

X

K1

Y

G10

G11

(*)

L2L

X

K1 K1

Y

(*)N M

Z

H16

P4P9

P7

H17

X

P8

(*) short terminal shields are mandatory

ChassisSee withdrawable Compact, page 164.

Y

X

K20K21

G20

G21

∅T

U

Mounting

Through panel M (plug-in base) Through panel M (chassis)2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P

K

G10

G11

K1

G12

G13

K11K12

X

Y∅T

KK2

K11K13

X

Y

K

G10

G11

K1

G12

G13

K5K6

X

Y∅T

KK2

K5K7

X

Y

On rails (plug-in base or chassis)2P, 3P 4P

Y

X

K20K22

167

4

Dimensions (mm)Type C11 C13 C16 C17 G10 G11 G12 G13 G20 G21 H16

NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 84 55 42.5 95 190 87 174 37.5 75 102.5NS400/630N/H/L 155 84 116.5 56 150 300 137 274 75 150 157.5

Type H17 K K1 K2 K5 K6 K7 K11 K12 K13 K20NS100/160/250N/H/L 205 17.5 35 70 54.5 109 144 74 148 183 35NS400/630N/H/L 315 22.5 45 90 71.5 143 188 91.5 183 228 50

Type K21 K22 L L1 L2 P4 P7 P8 P9 P44 R8NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 105 52.5 105 140 111(1) 27 45 75 123 74NS400/630N/H/L 100 145 70 140 185 168 27 45 100 147 90

(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.

Type R9 R33 R34 ØT U(2)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 148 74 148 6 ≤ 32NS400/630N/H/L 180 91.5 148 6 ≤ 32

(2) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).

∆

h

Y

C17

C11

R33R34

C16

C13

X

R8R9

P44Z

Front-panel cutouts

Plug-in base Chassis with protection collar and escutcheonsSee fixed Compact, page 160.


168

Dimensions

4

Compact NS100 to 250(single-pole and two-pole versions)

Dimensions1 pole 2 poles

H

Z

H1

H2

H3 H7

H6

P1P2P4

X

Y

L4L3

(a)(b)

X

Y

L5L3

Mounting

On backplate1 pole 2 poles

K1K

X

Y

ØTG

G1

G4

G5

ØT4 (c)

K1

X

Y

K

On rails1 pole 2 poles

Y

X

K1KU (d)

ØTG

G1

Y

X

K

(a) short terminal shields(b) interphase barriers

(c) for rear connection only

(d) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used

169

4

Front-panel cutout

X

Y

C2

C3X

Y

C2

C3

R2R4(1P)R5(2P)

X

Y

C

C1

RR1P5

P6

B/C

Z

∆

h

With escutcheon

P6

Z

X

Y

C6

C7

R6R7

Dimensions (mm)Type C C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 G G1 G4 G5 H

NS100/160/250 29 76 54 108 43 104 62.5 125 70 140 80.5

Type H1 H2 H3 H4 H6 H7 K K1 L3 L4 L5NS100/160/250 161 94 188 160.5 178.5 357 17.5 35 17.5 70 35

Type P1 P2 P4 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6NS100/160/250 81 86 111 83 88 14.5 29 19 38 73 29

Type R7 ØT ØT4 U(d)

NS100/160/250 58 6 22 ≤ 32

(d) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used


170

Dimensions

4

Motor-mechanism module forCompact NS100 to 630

Dimensions3 poles 4 poles

H20

Z

H21

P33P32

H22

H23

X

Y

L1

L

L11

L12

Front-panel cutoutsWith IP 40, IK 07 escutcheons and protection collarfor Vigi module

P45Z

Y

C17

C11

R33R34

C16

C13

X

R8R9

ZP45

X

Y

C22

C23

R14R15

X

Y

L2L

∆

hNote.Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in theenclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the doorhinge.

171

4

Dimensions (mm)Type C11 C13 C16 C17 C22 C23 H20 H21 H22 H23 L L1

NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 84 56 42.5 29 76 62.5 97 45.5 73 52.5 105NS400/630N/H/L 155 84 116.5 56 41.5 126 100 152 83 123 70 140

Type L2 L11 L12 P32 P33 P45 R8 R9 R14 R15 R33 R34NS100/160/250N/H/L 140 91 45.5 178 143 145 74 148 48.5 97 74 148NS400/630N/H/L 185 123 61.5 250 215 217 90 180 64.5 129 91.5 148

172

Dimensions

4

H20

Z

P34

P36 (b)P37 (c)

(a) sans serrure(b) avec serrure Ronis + clef(c) avec serrure Profalux + clef

P35 (a)

H23

Rotary handlefor Compact NS100 to 630

direct rotary handle3 poles 4 poles

Protection collar for Vigi module is mandatory.Escutcheons are mandatory for rotary handles and Vigi protection collars.

An escutcheon is mandatory

O

I

DD

60°

60° X

Y

L1

LL11

L12

H24

L15

O

I

DD

60°

60°X

Y

L2L

Front-panel cutoutsFixed or plug-in circuit breaker

Compact Vigicompact

ZP43

X

Y

C22

C23

R14R15

C4

C5

R28R26

X

Y

C22

C23

R14R15

Z P43

(a) without keylock(b) with Ronis keylock(c) with Profalux keylock

Withdrawable circuit breaker

Compact Vigicompact

P44Z

Y

C17

C11

R8R9

X

P44Z

Y

C17

C11

R33R34

C16

C13

X

R8R9

173

4

Dimensions (mm)Type C4 C5 C11 C13 C16 C17 C22 C23 G36 G37 G38 G39 H9 H10 H20 H23 H24

NS100/160/250N/H/L 86 37 103 84 55 42,5 29 76 36 72 41 100 60 120 28 73 9NS400/630N/H/L 147,5 37 155 84 116,5 56 41,5 126 36 72 51 145 83 160 40 123 24,5

Type H25 H26 K14 K15 L L1 L2 L7 L8 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 P34 P35 P36NS100/160/250N/H/L 37,5 75 50 100 52,5 105 140 69 120 91 9,25 37,5 75 55 121 155 156NS400/630N/H/L 37,5 75 72,5 145 70 140 185 85 160 123 5 37,5 75 66,5 145 179 180

Type P37 P38(1) P40(1) P42 P43 P44 R1 R8 R9 R14 R15 R26 R33 R34 ØT6 ØT7NS100/160/250N/H/L 164 ≥ 185 ≥ 248 125 89 123 29 74 148 48,5 97 14,5 74 148 4,2 50NS400/630N/H/L 188 ≥ 209 ≥ 272 149 112 147 29 90 180 64,5 129 32 91,5 148 4,2 50

(1) 600 mm.

MCC direct rotary handleFront-panel cutout

Front-panel cutout

Y

X

L1245°

∅T6

∅T7

H24

G36

G37

Nota :Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where 100 + (h x 5)with respect to the door hinge.

X

Z

P42±2

1 to 3 maxi

L12

L8L7

H24

H9

H10

Y

X

Y

X

K15K14

G38

G39

Extended rotary handleFixed or plug-in circuit breaker Withdrawable circuit breakerCut shaft at length: Cut shaft at length:P38-126 mm (NS100 to 250) P40-122 mm (NS100 to 250)P38-150 mm (NS400 to 630) P40-150 mm (NS400 to 630)

10

ZP38

O

I

Y

X

L14L13

L12

H26

H25

H24

60°

60°

174

Dimensions

4

Indicationand measurement modulesfor Compact NS100 to 630

DimensionsCircuit breaker with ammeter module Circuit breaker with current-transformer module

P1P2

P4Z

H8

H9

H10

H11 H13

H12

H15

H14

P1P2

P47Z

H8

H9

H10

H11 H13

H12

H15

H14

Mounting


G6

G7

K1 K1K1

G

K

G1

G8

G9X

Y

∅T

∅T4 (d)

K1 K1 K1K2

K

X

Y


Y

X

KK1

G

G1

G6

G7

∅T

U (e)

Y

X

KK2


175

4

Front-panel cutoutCircuit breaker with ammeter module and voltage-presence indicator

ZP43

X

Y

C22

C23

R14R15

C28

C27

R17R16

C30

∅T8

P6Z

Dimensions (mm)Type C C1 C22 C23 C27 C28 C29 C30 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9 H8 H9 H10

NS100/160/250N/H/L 28 76 28 76 56.5 124 30 78.5 62.5 125 137.5 200 145 215 155.5 236 169NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 41.5 126 56.5 185.5 30 122 100 200 200 300 213.5 327 227.5 355 242.5

Type H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K2 P1 P2 P4 P6 P43 P47 P48 R R1NS100/160/250N/H/L 263 235.5 396 253.5 432 17.5 35 70 81 86 111(1) 88 89 137 128 14.5 29NS400/630N/H/L 385 340 580 337 574 22.5 45 90 95.5 110 168 112 112 162 154 31.5 63

Type R14 R15 R16 R17 ØT ØT4 U(2)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 48.5 97 46.5 93 6 22 ≤ 32NS400/630N/H/L 64.5 129 64.5 93 6 32 ≤ 32

(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS 250N/H/L(2) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).

C

C1

C27

C28

R

Y

R1R16

R17

X

C30

∅T8

176

Dimensions

4

Protection collarToggle protection collar

M

A D

52,4

91 35 63

Front-panel escutcheonsFor toggle

M8

A3 D3

M2

A1 D2D1

M3

Toggle cover

79

69 6,53,5

64

For Vigi module

Vigi-module protection collar Circuit breaker with Circuit breaker withtoggle or rotary handle motor-mechanism

module

Front accessoriesfor Compact NS100 to 630

. .

177

4Dimensions (mm)Type A A1 A2 A3 D D1 D2 D3 M M2 M3 M6 M7 M8

NS100/160/250N/H/L 91 69 157 94 35 3.5 6.5 40 73 115 102 114 101 94NS400/630N/H/L 123 102 189 35 134 3.5 6.5 60 123 155 142 164 151 134

Front-panel escutcheonsFor protection collar, motor mechanism or rotary handle

M6

A2 D2D1

M7

For Vigi module with protection collar or ammeter module

93,5

157 6,53,5

80,5

Dimensions

178

4

X

105

94

105

Y

105 (3P)175 (4P)

188

123

99,599,5 (3P)

169,5 (4P)

35

70

117

234

100

200

123

X

F

Z

210

175,5

169,5

107,5

210X

105

94

105

Y

105 (3P)175 (4P)

188

123

35

70

117

234

123

X

F

205 14

92,5

113

107,5

140,5

146,5

Z

99,5

200

99,5 (3P)169,5 (4P)

100

X

Y

Compact NS630b to 1600(fixed version)Dimensions

Electrical control

Front and rear connection

Rear connection

Manual control

Front connection

Note.Dimensions for front and rearconnection on electricallyoperated devices areidentical to those formanually operated devices.

F : Datum

(1) terminal shields areoptional

(1)

163,5254

508327

107,5

205

F

Z

X

179

4

X100

200

4 Ø6,5Y

99,599,5 (3P)169,5 (4P)

X100

200

99,599,5 (3P)169,5 (4P)

Y

4 Ø6,5

X

Y4 Ø6,5

117

234

44

44106

106

35

70

100

200

X

Y6 Ø6,5

117

234

44

44

106

35

70

100

270

70

106

Front connection

On rails On backplate

Rear connection

On backplate or rails

3P 4P

Note.Mounting parameters for electrically operated devices are identical to those for manuallyoperated devices.

X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole deviceZ is the back plane of the device.

Mounting

Dimensions

180

4Y

X

119 (1)144 (2)

194 mini (3P)264 mini (4P)

194 mini

95,5 (1)108 (2)

35,5 (1)60,5 (2)

71 (1)121 (2)

Y

X 216 (1)266 (2)

194 mini (3P)264 mini (4P) 194 mini

108 (1)133 (2)

97 (1)122 (2)

194 (1)244 (2)

X

(C)(B)(A)

150(2)

FZ

124 mini(1) (2)

107,5

140,5

146,5

X

(A)

FZ

150 mini(1) (2)

107,5

169,5

175,5

Y

X 216 (1)266 (2)

194 mini (3P)264 mini (4P)

194 mini

108 (1)133 (2)

97 (1)122 (2)

194 (1)244 (2)

Electrical controlDoor cutoutA

Toggle control

Door cutoutA B

C

(1) Without escutcheon(2) With escutcheon


Compact NS630b to 1600(fixed version) (cont.)

Front-panel cutouts

181

4

(D)(B)(A)

X

FZ

229,5

195

180 mini(2)

124 mini(1) (2)

107,5

154,5

160,5

189,5

Y

X201 (1)

194 mini

90,5 (1)

181 (1)

100,5 (1)

Y

X 201 (1)

194 mini (3P)264 mini (4P) 194 mini

90,5 (1)

130 (1)

100,5 (1)

Y

X 216 (1)266 (2)

194 mini (3P)264 mini (4P)

194 mini

108 (1)133 (2)

97 (1)122 (2)

194 (1)244 (2)

Extended rotary handle

Dimensions Door cutout

Rotary handle

Direct rotary handle

Dimensions

Door cutoutA B D

F : Datum

Note.X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole deviceZ is the back plane of the device.


Dimensions

182

4

Y

117

234X

102,5102,5 (3P)172,5 (4P)

X

F

25

100

24

231

216

4 Ø6,5

Y

109109 (3P)179 (4P)

150

50

X

Y

9090 (3P)160 (4P)

6 Ø6,5

F

25 100

90

Y94

188

160,5127,5 (3P)197,5 (4P)

123

199

X

90 (3P)160 (4P)

Compact NS630b to 1600(withdrawable version)Dimensions, mounting and cutouts

Dimensions

Manual control Electrical control

Mounting

Bottom mounting on base plate or rails Vertical on uprights or backplate

Cutouts

Door cutout Rear panel cutout

Note.X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. F : Datum


(*) Withdrawable position

183

4


Door cutout

(*) Widrawable position

Rotary handle

Direct rotary handle

Dimensions

Extended rotary handle

Dimensions Door cutout

Note.X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device

Dimensions

184

4

X

165

330

Z

131

390

160,5166,5

F

20

40

242

(C)

(B)(A) 145 mini

210X

105

Y

75

150

169

338

180180 (3P)295 (4P)

210210 (3P)325 (4P)

195195 (3P)310 (4P)

162

X

Y

75

150

4 Ø12

195195 (3P)310 (4P)

Compact NS1600b to 3200(fixed version)Dimensions

Dimensions

Mounting on rails

185

4X

Y

119

146

73

95,9

X

Y

332

201

100,5

166

X

Y

346

216

108

173

Door cutoutA B

C

Note.X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device

Dimensions

186

4

S : 2,5 mm2

S : 0,6 mm2

8

2

1

Ø3,5

Compact NS630b to 3200External modules

External power-supply module (AD)

Battery module (BAT)

73

75112

60

60 2 Ø6

73

75112

60

60 2 Ø6

Control-wire connections to terminal block

Only one wire per terminal.

187

4

57

66

2 Ø4,2

73

46

MN delay unit

7273,5

81 42

Chassis communication moduleModBus Digipact

External sensor for source ground return (SGR) protectionExternal sensor "MDGF" summing module

45

5458

90

45

200

150

76

130

Dimensions

188

4

Compact NS630b to 3200External modules (cont.)

External sensor for neutral

400/1600 A (NS630b to 1600)

1000/4000 A (NS1600b to 3200)

Installation400/1600 (NS630b to NS1600) 1000/4000 A (NS1600b to NS3200)

7635

177

208

4 Ø14

VCVNGND

SG1SG2X2 X1

H1 H2

SG1SG2X1X2GNDVNVC

44

295

127

174

8 Ø14

44 44

H1 H2

189

4

Busbars I i 1600 A I i 3200 ASensor 280 x 115 470 x 160Weight (kg) 14 18

M1M2M3

4 Ø9280 x 115 mm inside dimensions

470 x 160 mm inside dimensions

M1M2M3

8 Ø9

Vigi rectangular sensor

Busbars path

280 x 115 windowBusbars spaced 70 mm centre-to-centre

470 x 160 windowBusbars spaced 115 mm centre-to-centr

M1M2M3

2 bars 100 x 5

M1M2M3

2 bars 50 x 10M1 M2M3

4 bars 100 x 5

M1 M2M3

4 bars 125 x 5

Dimensions

190

4

Escutcheon

NS630b to 1600 (fixed control)A C

Accessories NS630b to 3200

NS630b to NS1600 (withdrawable control)

191

4

192

5

193

5

Connection

Presentation 8Functions and characteristics 16Installation recommendations 131Dimensions 155

Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N 194Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 196Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (plug-in andwithdrawable versions) 198Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version)Bars 200Cables with lugs and bare cables 203

Compact NS630b to 1600(plug-in and withdrawable versions)Bars 204Cables with lugs 206

Compact NS1600b to 3200 (fixed version) 207

Electrical diagrams 209Additional characteristics 237Catalogue numbers 251More information about Schneider Electric 292

Compact NS

Connection

194

5

Compact NS80H-MA,NSC100N

Compact NS80H-MA

195

5

Compact NSC100N

X

9045

Y

3030

48,5

48,5X

Z

34,5

34,5

83

Connection

196

5

X

Z

P13P21

X

YK1K1K1

G4

G19

G5

Front connection

TerminalsNS100/160/250 NS400/630

ConnectorsNS100/160/250 NS400/630

Rear connectionNS100/160/250 NS400/630

(*) Short RC / long RC

70

Z

X

10,5

113,5

Z

X

14

Z

X

19

70

Z

X

14

113,5

Z

X

113,5

46,5

Compact, VigicompactNS100 to 630 (fixed version)

Connection dimensions

197

5

Connection with accessories

Note.For dimensions of conductors, see pages 88.

NS400/630

Dimensions (mm)Type G4 G5 G19 G26 G27 K1 K8 K9 K10 P13 P21

NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 140 215 30 41 35 45 159 114 19.5(1)

NS400/630N/H/L 113.5 227 327 39 54 45 52.5 187.5 135 26 4452,5 67,5 70 240 170

(1) P13 = 21.5 mm for NS250N/H/L and Vigi MH module

Distribution connectors (interphase barriers mandatory)NS100/160/250

20,5

37,539,5 (b)

70

4

XZ

Z34

61

113,5

8

X

Z

X

4130

70

41

64,566,5 (b)

70

X

Z

X

Y

K8 K8K10

G27

G26

X

Y

K8K8 K8K9

NS400/630

(b) Vigi module or NS250.

NS100/160/250 NS100/160/250

(b) Vigi module or NS250.

Right-angle terminal extensions (upstream only) Straight or edgewise terminal extensions

Spreader

Connection

198

5

Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630(plug-in and withdrawable versions)

Plug-in base or chassis

X

Z

X

K1 K1

Y

K1

Front connection

TerminalsNS100/160/250 NS400/630Mounting on backplate or on rails (1) With spreaders

(*)

ConnectorsNS100/160/250 NS400/630Mounting on backplate or on rails (1) With spreaders

(*)

G32

P21

G31

E

X

Z

G32

P21

G31

8

X

Z

42

195,5210,5

G34

X

Z

P28

G32

68

G31

X

Z

94

202

(1) For backplate mounting, the insulating screen, suppliedwith the plug-in base, must be installed.


199

5

(*)

P29P30

G34

X

Z

G32

X

Z

10983

9466

ConnectorsNS100/160/250 NS400/630Mounting through backplate or on rails

Rear connection

Mounting through backplate or on rails

(*)

Mounting on backplateRight-angle extensions (mounted down and out)

(*)

Right-angle extensions (mounted up and out)(*)

Dimensions (mm)Type E G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 K1 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30

NS100/160/250N/H/L 4 108.5 100 63.5 110 80.5 35 19 75.5 67 49 57.5 75.5 67 26.5 54.5 36.5NS400N/H/L 6 171 156.5 104 129 45 26 114.5 100 82 96.5 108.5 94NS630N/H/L 6 181 166.5 104 129 45 26 124.5 110 92 104.5 108.5 94

Long, insulated right-angleterminal extensions aremandatory.

G33

E

P24P25

P23P22

X

Z

G35

G33

E

P27P26

X

Z

G35

E

P27P26

X

Z


Connection

200

5

Compact NS630b to 1600(fixed version)Bars

259,5

44

152 vis M10

15

9,525

44

152 vis M10

15

Note.Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer

Horizontal rear connection


Front connection

YN

707070

2 Ø11

25 9,5

44

12,560

12,5

25

9,5

44

12,5

60

12,5

2 Ø11

X

129

129

163,5

FZ

163,5

16,5

View A detail

View A detail


F

15

15

67,5

67,5

123

123

43,5

X

Z

31

F

43,5

X

Z

31

97

97

201

5

Front connection with spreaders

Rear connection with spreaders

Note.X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

X

181

181

FZ

31,5

196

196

15

52,5

82,5

123

123

98

15

83

F

X

Z

Y

70 70

95 95

YN

7070 70

12,5 12,5

95 95 95

Spreader detail

52

5 Ø11

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

15

305282

25

View A detail

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

5282 15

30

25

52

5 Ø11 5 Ø11

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

15

305282

25

52

5 Ø11

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

15

305282

25

52

Middle left or middle rightspreader for 4P

Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P

F : Datum

Connection

202

5

Note.

(1) two mounting possibilities for vertical-connection adapters(pitch 21 mm).Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer

Front connection with vertical-connection adapters

X

200

200

430

FZ

10

62,5

3 Ø11

12,5=25 =

89

15

21

20

10121 (1)

15

View A detail

Compact NS630b to 1600(fixed version) (cont.)

Bars

203

5

Front connection with vertical-connection adapters and cable-lug adapters

X

200

200

250

FZ

10

150

250

15

15

530

50

50 50 5017

184

80

5 Ø13 5 Ø11

View A detail

Fixed circuit breaker with 4-cable bare-cable connectors (240 mm2)

Cables with lugs and bare cables

54

6326

26

4 Ø21,5

Connection

204

5

2 Ø11

25 9,5

44

12,560

12,5

25

9,5

44

12,5

60

12,5

2 Ø11

100

9,525

44

9,5

26

52

37,9

2 Ø11

259,5

44

26

37,9

83131

9,5

2 Ø11

267,5

F

15

67,5

114

X

49

15

67,5

228YN

707070


267,5

F

X

97

49

97

235

F

X

171

12,5

336

140

15

Compact NS630b to 1600(plug-in and withdrawable versions)Bars


Horizontal rear connection


Front connection

View A detail

View A detail

205

5

Front connection with spreaders

Spreader detail

250

F

X

223

207192

238

52

5 Ø11

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

15

305282

25

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

5282 15

30

25

52

5 Ø11 5 Ø11

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

15

305282

25

52

5 Ø11

13,5=25 =

38,5

77

15

305282

25

52

View A detail

Middle left or middle rightspreader for 4P

Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P

Connection

206

5

Compact NS630b to 1600(plug-in and withdrawable versions) (cont.)

Cables with lugs

Note.X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washerX and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device

F : Datum

193,5

F

X

50

292

583

15

15

71

171

140

71

50

261

21

21 50

50 50 5017

184

80

5 Ø13 5 Ø11

View A detail

Front connection with vertical-connection adapters and cable-lug adapters

207

5

X

150165

ZF

20

165

150

Front connection (NS1600b to 2500)

View A detail

Front connection with vertical-connection adapters (NS1600b to 2500)

Compact NS1600b to 3200(fixed version)


X Z

40

25F

230

230

142,5

142,5

XZ

25F

230

230

142,5

142,5

40

20

20

15 25

60

80

100

25

20

45

12,5

25

25

25

60

4 Ø11

Front connection (NS3200)

View A detail

20

20

15 25

60

80

100

25

20

45

12,5

25

25

25

60

4 Ø11

View A detail

208

6

209

6

Electrical diagrams

Presentation 8Functions and characteristics 16Installation recommendations 131Dimensions 155Connection 193

Compact NSC100, Compact NS80H-MAIndication contacts 210Early-make contacts 211

Compact NS100 to 630Indication contacts 212Motor mechanism (automatic reset) 214Motor mechanism (remote reset) 216Motor mechanism (local reset) 218Early-make contacts 220Motor protection - Trip unit STR22/43ME 222

Compact NS630b to 1600Fixed circuit breakers 226Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers 228

Compact NS630b to 3200Communications option 24 V DC external power supply 230Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection, neutral protection, 232zone selective interlockingFixed circuit breakers 234

Additional characteristics 237Catalogue numbers 251More information about Schneider Electric 292

Compact NS

210

Electrical diagrams

6

SymbolsQ Compact NSSD trip indication contactOF ON / OFF indication contactMN undervoltage releaseMX shunt releaseCAO early-break contact of rotary handleCAF early-make contact of rotary handleXI terminal block for CAF wiring (must be ordered)F1 breaker for the protection of MN/MXH1 lamp signalling tripped position

Compact NSC100Compact NS80H-MAIndication contacts

With OF1 and CAO1 With OF1 and CAF1/CAF2

CAF1 CAF2

12 14

OF1

11

(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2)

With MN With MX

The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised, all devices open, connected andcharged and relays in the normal position.

Colour code for auxiliary wiringRD redGN greenBK blackBL blueWH white

211

6

With MN

With MN + SD

Early-make contacts

Following tripping due to an electrical fault,reset must be carried out locally andmanually.

(1) independent auxiliary source.

RemarkNS80H-MA and NSC100 circuit breakers are not plug-in orwithdrawable devices. As a result, there is no automaticauxiliary connector. Connections are made directly to thedevice.

212

Electrical diagrams

6

(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2)(2) for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF2 contacts can be installed in thecircuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors.

Compact NS100 to 630Indication contacts


Manually operated circuit breaker

Circuit breaker with motor mechanism

Auxiliary wiring for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakerAutomatic auxiliary connectors Manual auxiliary connectors(wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2) (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2)

91 92 94

D4C2C1

D1

141211 7222

7424

7121

A2

84L1

82A1

81

A4 B4

C1D1

C2

D4

12

14

11

92

94

917121

A4

B4

A2

84

A181

7222

L182

7424

Fixed part (rear view).

SymbolsQ Compact NS100 to 250SD trip indication contactSDE fault indication contactSDV earth-fault indication contactOF ON / OFF indication contactMN undervoltage releaseMX shunt releaseMT motor-mechanism moduleCAO early-break contact of rotary handleCAF early-make contact of rotary handleCE connected-position carriage switchCD disconnected-position carriage switch

Colour code for auxiliary wiringRD redGN greenBK blackVT violetYE yellowGY greyBL blueOR orangeWH white


Fixed part(front view looking into base)

(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2)(2) for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF2 contacts can be installed in thecircuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors(3) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.

213

6


Manually operated circuit breaker

Circuit breaker with motor mechanism

Auxiliary wiring for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakerAutomatic auxiliary connectors Manual auxiliary connectors(wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2) (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2)

(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2).(2) for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF3 contacts can be installed in thecircuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors.(3) options available with trip unit STR53UE only.

(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2).(2) for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF3 contacts can be installed in thecircuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors.(3) options available with trip unit STR53UE only.(4) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.

SymbolsQ Compact NS100 to 250SD trip indication contactSDE fault indication contactSDV earth-fault indication contactOF ON / OFF indication contactMN undervoltage releaseMX shunt releaseMT motor-mechanism moduleCAO early-break contact of rotary handleCAF early-make contact of rotary handleCE connected-position carriage switchCD disconnected-position carriage switch

Colour code for auxiliary wiringRD redGN greenBK blackVT violetYE yellowGY greyBL blueOR orangeWH white

Fixed part (rear view).

Fixed part(front view looking into base)

21Z12

e_

Z11

22

T2 24

e+T1

C1D1

C2

D4

12

14

11

92

94

917131

A4

B4

A2

84

A181

7232

L182

7434

R1T1

R2T2

7232

7434

7131

Z12

Z11 e+ e_

91 92 94

D4C2C1

D1

141211 22 2421

A2

84L182

A181

A4 B4

214

Electrical diagrams

6

SymbolsQ Compact NS100 to 630SDE fault indication contactMT motor-mechanism moduleF1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module circuitsH1 lamp signalling an electrical faultH2 lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual positionF closing orderO opening order orders must not be simultaneous

(must be > 150 ms)

Colour code for auxiliary wiringRD redGN greenBK blackBL blueOR orangeWH white

Compact NS100 to 630Motor mechanism(automatic reset)

Automatic reset with MN

Automatic reset with MX

(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.(2) the tripping order must lock out the closing order.

(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.(2) the tripping order must lock out the closing order.



215

6

Automatic reset without auxiliary

Control via switch or relay

With MN/MXControlled by switch Controlled by relay

A2

F

A4 B4

82 81

O

MTB2

21

A2

F

A4 B4

82 81

O

MTB2

21

A2

F

A4 B4

82 81

O

MTB2 A2

F

A4 B4

82 81

O

MTB2

(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.

Without auxiliaryControlled by switch Controlled by relay

216

Electrical diagrams

6

Compact NS100 to 630Motor mechanism(remote reset)

Remote reset with MN

(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correctoperation.(2) connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary-connector terminal 84.(3) the tripping order must lock out the closing order.

SymbolsQ Compact NS100 to 630SDE fault indication contactMN undervoltage releaseMX shunt releaseMT motor-mechanism moduleF1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module

circuits and MN/MXH2 lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual positionR reset order

(must be > 150 ms) ordersF closing order must notO opening order be simultaneous

(must be > 150 ms,has priority over F order)


Remote reset with MX



217

6

A2

F

A4 B4

81

O

MT

B2

21

R

A2

F

A4 B4

81

O

MT

B2

21

R

Remote reset without auxiliary


With MN/MXControlled by switch Controlled by relay


A2

F

A4 B4

81

O

MT

B2

R

A2

F

A4 B4

81

O

MT

B2

R

(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correctoperation.(2) connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary-connector terminal 84.

218

Electrical diagrams

6

Compact NS100 to 630Motor mechanism(local reset)

Local reset with MN

Local reset with MX

trip unit

82 84

SDE(2)

81

B2 A2

A2

A4

A4

B4

B4

A1 L1

A1 L1

Q

F1

F OH2

MT

84

H1

MN

D1

D1

D4

D4

(1)

CN2 - CN2 –CN1 - CN1 +

trippingorder

(1) (2) required to ensure correct indication of an electricalfault.

SymbolsQ Compact NS100 to 630SDE fault indication contactMN undervoltage releaseMX shunt releaseMT motor-mechanism moduleF1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module

circuits and MN/MXH1 lamp signalling an electrical faultH2 lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual positionF closing order ordersO opening order must not

(must be > 150 ms, be simultaneoushas priority over F order)




219

6

A2

F

A4 B4

81

O

MT

B2A2

F

A4 B4

81

O

MT

B2

21

A2

F

A4 B4

81

O

MT

B2

21

Local reset without auxiliary


With MN/MX

(1) (2) required to ensure correct indication of an electricalfault.


220

Electrical diagrams

6

Compact NS100 to 630Early-make contacts

trippingorder

Q

C1

D1

D1

D4

D4

MN

CAF2CAF1

(1)CN1 - CN1 +

CN2 - CN2 –

1 2 3 4 5 6X1

trip unit

With MN

SymbolsQ Compact NSSD trip indication contactMN undervoltage releaseCAF early-make contact of rotary handleXI terminal block for CAF wiring

(must be ordered)

Colour code for auxiliary wiringRD redGN greenBK blackBL blueWH white



(1) independent auxiliary source

221

6

With MN + SD

(1) independent auxiliary source

222

Electrical diagrams

6

Compact NS100 to 630Motor protectionTrip unit STR22/43ME

Thermal-fault indication

SymbolsQ Compact NS100 to 630F1 breaker for protection of the auxiliary circuitSDTAM thermal-fault early-break signalBP1 SDTAM reset buttonKA1 auxiliary relay - Telemecanique

CA...DN31 or CA...DN22H1 lamp signalling SDTAM fault

Colour code for auxiliary wiringBL blueWH white


223

6

Automatic operation

tr overload (long-time) protection tripping timeoverload current greater than Ir (long-time tripping threshold)IQ closing order for circuit breaker Q

Note.For a short-circuit or earth fault, only circuit breaker Q opens.The above automatic control sequence is not run.

Legendc O: OFF (circuit open)c I: ON (circuit closed)c : either ON or OFF

224

Electrical diagrams

6

Compact NS100 to 630Motor protectionTrip unit STR22/43ME

Thermal-fault indication and tripping

SymbolsQ Compact NS100 to 630F1 breaker for protection of the auxiliary circuitSDTAM thermal-fault early-break signalBP1 SDTAM reset buttonKA1 auxiliary relay - Telemecanique

CA...DN31 or CA...DN22KA2 mechanical latching unit -

Telemecanique LA6 DK1RHK bistable relay - Telemecanique

RHK-41H1 lamp signalling SDTAM faultKM1 power contactor

Colour code for auxiliary wiringBL blueWH white


(1) KM1 operating conditions must be inserted between 22 and A1.

225

6

Automatic operation

tr overload (long-time) protection tripping timeoverload current greater than Ir (long-time tripping threshold)

Note.For a short-circuit or earth fault, only circuit breaker Q opens.The above automatic control sequence is not run.

Same automatic system using a bistable relay

F1

X1

RHK

E4

C

12 11 14 22 21 24 X

X2

A1

A2KM1 H1

(1)

BP1

D4

D1

CN1 - CN1 +CN2 - CN2 –

(1) KM1 operating conditions must be inserted between12 and A1.

Legendc O: OFF (circuit open)c I: ON (circuit closed)c : either ON or OFF

226

Electrical diagrams

6

Compact NS630b to 1600Fixed circuit breakers


Power Control unit Remote operation

– (basic) A

c c

c

c

c

E1-E6 communication

Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking:Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCEZ2 = ZSI OUT; Z3 ZSI IN SOURCEZ4 = ZSI IN ST (short time)Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault)M1 = Vigi module input(Micrologic 7)T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral;M2, M3 = Vigi module input(Micrologic 7)

F2+, F1- external 24 V DCpower supply

Control unit

MN : undervoltage releaseorMX : shunt release

Motor-mechanism module (*)A4 : electrical opening orderA2 : electrical closing orderB4, A1 : power supply for control devices and gear motor

Remote operation

AT

MN

BPO BPF

MX

or

motor-mechanismmodule

A1CN2 - 440/480 V

9 11

B4

R

A2A4

CN1 - 440/480 V


–: basic Micrologic control unitA: digital ammeter

(*) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC(380 V motor + additional resistor)

227

6

Indication contacts

Indication contacts

OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : indication contacts

SDE : fault-trip indication contact(short-circuit, overload, earth fault)

SD : trip indication contact(manual operation)

CAF2/CAF1 : early-make contact(rotary handle)

CAO2 / CAO1 : early-break contact(rotary handle)

Terminal-block marking (electrical operation)

Terminal-block marking (manual operation)

E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5M1M2M3

T1 T2 T3F1T4

F2

MN/MX

D2/C2

D1/C1

CAO2CAO1CAF2CAF1

524

522

521

514

512

511

544

542

541

534

532

531

84

SDE

82

81

OF111 12 14

OF221 22 24

OF331 32 34

SD91 92 94

E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1MN/MX

D2/C2

D1/C1Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5

M1M2 M3T1 T2 T3

F1T4

F2

A1A2A4B4

SDE OF3 OF2 OF1

81

82

84

31

32

34

21

22

24

11

12

14

228

Electrical diagrams

6

or

AT

MN

BPO BPF

MXmotor-mechanismmodule

Remote operationMN / MX MT2 MT1

D2 C2 A4 A2

B4

D1 C1 A1

Control unitCom UC1 UC2 UC3

E5 E6 Z5 M1 M2 M3 F2+

E3 E4 Z3 Z4 T3 T4

E1 E2 Z1 Z2 T1 T2 F1 –

Compact NS630b to 1600Plug-in / withdrawablecircuit breakers

Terminal-block marking

A1CN2 - 440/480 V

9 11

B4

R

A2A4

CN1 - 440/480 V




– (basic) A

c c

c

c

c

Control unit


Motor-mechanism module (*)MT2 : A4 : electrical opening order

MT1 : A2 : electrical closing orderB4, A1 :power supply for control devices

and gear motor (MCH)

Remote operation

–: basic Micrologic control unitA: digital ammeter

(*) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC(380 V motor + additional resistor)

Com : E1-E6 communication

UC1 : Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking:Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCEZ2 = ZSI OUT; Z3 ZSI IN SOURCEZ4 = ZSI IN ST (short time)Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault)M1 = Vigi module input(Micrologic 7)

UC2 : T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral;M2, M3 = Vigi module input(Micrologic 7)

UC3 : F2+, F1- external 24 V DCpower supply

229

6

CT1

Test

CD2 CD1

disconnected

Indication contactsCAF2 CAF1 SDE SD CAO2 CAO1 OF3 OF2 OF1

544 534 84 94 524 514 34 24 14

542 532 82 92 522 512 32 22 12

541 531 81 91 521 511 31 21 11

Indication contacts

Indication contacts

OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : indication contacts


SD : trip indication contact(manual operation)

CAF2/CAF1 : early-make contact(rotary handle)

CAO2 / CAO1 : early-break contact(rotary handle)

CD2 : disconnectedCD1 position

CT1 : testposition

CE3 : connectedCE2 positionCE1

CE3 CE2 CE1

connected

LegendConnected(only one wire per connection point)

Carriage switches

Carriage switches

Carriage switchesCD2 CD1 CE3 CE2 CE1 CT1

824 814 334 324 314 914

822 812 332 322 312 912

821 811 331 321 311 911

230

Electrical diagrams

6

Compact NS630b to 3200Communications option24 V DC external power supply

3

2

1

0

24 V

4

5

0 V

A'B'

911

914

CT

AB

A'B/

ModbusDigipact

++

A/

B'BB +BB

E3 E4 E5 E6E1 E2

+

811

CD

311

CE

812 314

911

912

CT CD

811

812

CE

311

312

(1)

(2)

B'A'BA

(2)

24 VDC1A

24 VDCDC 150

24 V0 V

+

BBBB

+

SD

SDE

OF

SDE

OF

Micrologic

N L3L2L1

I

Q

H1 H2

H3 H4

G1G2

L3 L4

110/240 V AC24/125 V DC

BATmodule

ADmodule

devicecommunicationmodule

DigipactE3 / E4 twisted pairE5 / E6 twisted pair

ModbusCOM craddle

DigipactCOM craddle

CCP 303

manualoperation

opening order

closing order


Connection of the communications option

None of the control-unit protection functions require an auxiliary source. However, the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module) isrequired for certain operating configurations as indicated in the table below.

Circuit breaker Closed OpenFonction protection no noDisplay function no (3) yesCircuit-breaker status indications and control no nocommunications bus

The communications bus requires its own 24 V DC power source (E1, E2). This source is notthe same as the 24 V DC external power-supply module (F1-, F2+).

If the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module) is used, the maximum cable length betweenthe 24 V DC external power supply (G1, G2) and the Micrologic control unit (F1-, F2+) is tenmetres.

The BAT battery module, mounted in series upstream of the AD module, ensures anuninterrupted supply of power if the AD module power supply fails.

(1) Drawout device equipped with Com chassis modbus

(2) Fixed device or draw-out device without Com chassisDigipact

(3) except if current < 20% In

231

6

Communication switchboard

This configuration provides remote display and controlof Masterpacts equipped with the Modbus or DigipactCOM module. The Digipact bus can be combined withthe Modbus bus.

Bus Modbus Bus Modbus

Ethernet

RS 485

RS 232C

RS 485

PLC

DC150

CompactCOM Digipact

CompactCOM Modbus Sepam Vigilohm Altivar

PLC

TCP/IP

SC150contrafinterface

UA150sourcechange-ower

Dataconcentrator

Micrologic utilitiesSMS

PM150measure

PM300measure

Software


communicationBus

Device

Micrologic utilitiesSMS

Digipact Bus Modbus Bus

PC runningPC running

232

Electrical diagrams

6

Compact NS630b to 3200Earth-fault and earth-leakage protectionNeutral protectionZone selective interlocking

Micrologic 6I

Q

10 1176512

8

913 13 14

MDGF moduleX1

X2PE

H1

H2

External sensor (CT) for residual earth-fault protection

External transformer for source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protection

Connection of the secondary circuitCompact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A:c Unshielded cable with 1 twisted pairc Maximum length 150 metresc Cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2

c Recommended cable: Belden 9409 or equivalent.

Connection of current-transformer secondarycircuit for external neutralCompact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A:c Shielded cable with 2 twisted pairsc SG1 twisted with SG2c X1 twisted with X2c Shielding connected to GND on one end onlyc Maximum length 5 metresc Cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2


If supply is via the top, follow the shematics.If supply is via the bottom, control wiring is identical;for the power wiring, H1 is connected to the sourceside, H2 to the load side.For four-pole versions, for residual earth-faultprotection, the current transformer for the externalneutral is not necessary.

233

6

Connection of the rectangular-sensor secondarycircuitCompact equipped with a Micrologic 7 A:c Unshielded cable with 3 twisted conductors:v M1, M2, M3 twisted togetherc Maximum length 4 metresc Cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2


Earth-leakage protection

Zone selective interlocking

Micrologic 7I

Q

N L3L2L1

M1M2

M3

U

Note. The maximum permissible distance between twodevices is 3000 metres and the maximum number of devicesis 100.

c Three pole circuit breaker:v Neutral protection is impossible.c Four pole circuit breaker:v Compact equipped with Micrologic Av The current transformer for external neutral is not

necessary.

Neutral protection

A pilot wire interconnects a number of circuit breakersequipped with Micrologic A control units, as illustrated in thediagram above.The control unit detecting a fault sends a signal upstream andchecks for a signal arriving from downstream. If there is asignal from downstream, the circuit breaker remains closedfor the full duration of its tripping delay. If there is no signalfrom downstream, the circuit breaker opens immediately,whatever the tripping-delay setting.

Fault 1.Only circuit breaker A detects the fault. Because it receives nosignal from downstream, it immediately opens in spite of itstripping delay set to 0.3.

Fault 2.Circuit breakers A and B detect the fault. Circuit breaker Areceives a signal from B and remains closed for the fullduration of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Circuit breaker B doesnot receive a signal from downstream and opens immediately,in spite of its tripping delay set to 0.2.

234

Electrical diagrams

6

Compact NS1600b to 3200Fixed circuit breakers



– (basic) A

c c

c

c

c

E1-E6 communication

Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking:Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCEZ2 = ZSI OUT ; Z3 = ZSI IN SOURCEZ4 = ZSI IN ST (short time)Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault)M1 = Vigi module input(Micrologic 7)T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral;M2, M3 = Vigi module input(Micrologic 7)

F2+, F1- external 24 V DC powersupply

Control unit


Remote operation

: basic Micrologic control unitA: digital ammeter

235

6

Indication contacts

Indication contacts

OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : ON / OFF indication contacts


SD : trip indication contact

Terminal-block marking

E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1MN/MX

D2/C2

D1/C1OF1

11 12 14

OF221 22 24

OF331 32 34

SD91 92 94

84

SDE

82

81

Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5M1M2 M3

T1 T2 T3F1T4

F2

236

7

237

7

Additional characteristics

Presentation 8Functions and characteristics 16Installation recommendations 131Dimensions 155Connection 193Electrical diagrams 209

Tripping curvesCompact NSC100 238Compact NS80H-MA 239Compact NS100 to 250 protection of distribution systems 240Compact NS100 to 250 motor-starter protection 243Compact NS400 to 630 protection of distribution systems 244Compact NS400 to 630 motor-starter protection 245Compact NS630b to 3200 246Reflex tripping 247

Current-limiting curves 248

Catalogue numbers 251More information about Schneider Electric 292

Compact NS

238


7

Tripping curvesCompact NSC100

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

100A : Im = 12,5 x In

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

50A : Im = 20 x In63A : Im = 16 x In

80A : Im = 12,5 x In

70A : Im = 14,3 x In

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

16A : Im = 37,5 x In

25A : Im = 24 x In

32A : Im = 19 x In

40A : Im = 15 x In

20A : Im = 30 x In

16…40 A

50…80 A 100 A

239

7

MA1.5…MA80

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

Im = 6…14 x In

Compact NS80H-MA

240


7

Tripping curvesCompact NS100 to 250Protection of distribution systems

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

TM63D : 8 x In

TM63G :2 x In

TM50D : 10 x In

reflex tripping:t < 10 ms

t(s)

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

TM40D : 12 x In

TM40G :2 x In

TM32D : 12,5 x In


t(s)

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

TM16D : 12 x In

TM16G : 4 x In


TM16D / TM16G TM25D / TM25G

TM32D / TM40D / TM40G TM50D / TM63D / TM63G

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir


TM25D : 12 x In

TM25G :3.2 x In

TM magnetic trip units

241

7

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)


NS160/250Im = 12,5 x In

NS100Im = 8 x In

TM80D / TM100D

TM200D / TM250D

TM125D / TM160D

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)


TM125D10 x In

TM160D8 x In

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)


Im = 5 … 10 x In

TM magnetic trip units (cont.)

242


7

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

I = 11 x In


Ir = 0.4…1 x In

Im = 2…10 x Ir

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

Ir = 0.4…1 x In

Im = 2…10 x Ir


Ir = 0.4…1 x In

Im = 2…10 x Ir

I = 11 x In

STR22SE - 40…100 A STR22SE - 160…250 A

STR22GE - 40…100 A STR22GE - 160…250 A

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)


Ir = 0.4…1 x In

Im = 2…10 x Ir

I = 11 x In

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)


Ir = 0.4…1 x In

Im = 2…10 x Ir

I = 11 x In

STR22SE and STR22GE electronic trip units

Tripping curvesCompact NS100 to 250Protection of distribution systems (cont.)

243

7

Compact NS100 to 250Motor-starter protection

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

Ir

Im = 13 x Ir

I = 15 x In

class 10 (IEC 60947-4)

reflex tripping :t < 10 ms

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / In

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

MA220

MA150

thermal withstand


Im = 9 …14 x In

MA150 and MA220MA2,5…MA100

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

Im = 6 …14 x In


thermal withstand

STR22ME - 10…220 A

MA magnetic trip units

STR22ME electronic trip units

244


7

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)


Isd = 2…10 x Ir

Ir = 0.4…1 x In

I = 11 x In

I / Ir I / In

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

tr = 0.5…16 s

Isd = 1.5…10 x Ir

I2t ON

20.1

0

0.20.3

Ir = 0.4…1 x In

i t OFF

Ii = 1.5…11 x In


STR23SE / STR23SV STR53UE / STR53SV

Tripping curvesCompact NS400 to 630Protection of distribution systems

Options for STR53UEEarth-fault protection

.05.07.1 .2 .3 .4.5 .7 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30

I / In

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

I2t ON

Ig = 0.2…1 x In

I2t OFF

0.2

0.4

0.3

0.1

STR23 and STR53 electronic trip units

245

7

Compact NS400 to 630Motor-starter protection

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / In

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

Im = 9 ... 14 x In

thermal withstand


.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)hot tripping curve

cold tripping curve

reflex trippingt < 10 ms

class 10 A

Ii = 10,4 x In

Isd = 6…13 x Ir

MA320…MA500 STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 10 A

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)hot tripping curve

cold tripping curve

reflex trippingt < 10 ms

Ii = 10,4 x In

Isd = 6…13 x Ir

class 20

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

classe 10

reflextrippingt < 10 ms

hot tripping curve

cold tripping curve

Isd = 6…13 x Ir

Ii = 10,4 x In

STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 10 STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 20

MA magnetic and STR43ME electronic trip units

Thermal-withstand capacities are given for circuitbreakers operating in an ambient temperature of 65° C.

246


7

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300

I / Ir

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

t(s)

tr = 0,5...24 s

Isd = 1,5…10 x Ir

Ir = 0,4…1 x In

Tripping curvesCompact NS630b to 3200

Micrologic 2.0 Micrologic 5.0, 6.0, 7.0 - Micrologic 5.0A, 6.0A, 7.0A

Earth-fault protection (Micrologic 6.0)

Micrologic electronic control units

Options for Micrologic electronic control units

(1)

Ig = In x… A B C D E F G H JIg < 400 A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1400 A i Ig i 1200 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1Ig > 1200 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200

Ig = A…J x In (1) 1200 A max.

t(s)

I / In

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001.05.07 .1 .2 .3 .4.5 .7 1 2 3 5 7 10 200 300

I2t OFF

0.4

0.30.2

0.1

I2t ON

0.4

0.30.2

0.1

0 0

0

0,4

0,3

0,20,1

t(s)

x In

tr = 0,5…24 s

Isd = 1,5…10 x Ir

Ir = 0,4…1 x In

Ii = 2…15 x In . OFF

I2t OFF

x Ir

0,4

0,3

0,20,1

I2 t ON

0

.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 3 5 7 10 20 30

10 0005 000

2 000

1 000

500

200

100

50

20

10

5

2

1

.5

.2

.1.05

.02

.01

.005

.002

.001

247

7

5

20

10

8

7

6

4

3

2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200

t(ms)

TM16D...TM100DSTR22SE40... 100

STR22SE160

TM160D

TM160D...TM250DSTR22SE250

kA rms

Reflex tripping

Compact NS100 to 630 devicesincorporate the exclusive reflex-trippingsystem.This system breaks very high fault currentsby mechanically tripping the device via a"piston" actuated directly by the pressureproduced in the breaking units resultingfrom a short-circuit.For high short-circuits, this system providesa faster break and a trip guarantee, as wellas natural total discrimination.Reflex-tripping curves are exclusively afunction of the circuit-breaker framerating.

248


7

Current-limiting curves

Ics = 100% IcuThe exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range greatly reduces theforces created by fault currents in devices.The result is a major increase in breaking performance. In particular, the servicebreaking capacity Ics is equal to 100% of Icu.The Ics value, defined by IEC standard 60947-2, is guaranteed by tests comprisingthe following operations:c Break three times consecutively a fault current equal to 100% of Icuc Check that the device continues to function normally:v It conducts the rated current without abnormal temperature risev Protection functions perform within the limits specified by the standardv Suitability for isolation is not impaired.

Longer service life of electrical installationsCurrent-limiting circuit breakers greatly reduce the negative effects of short-circuitson installations.

Thermal effectsLess temperature rise in conductors, therefore longer service life for cables.

Mechanical effectsReduced electrodynamic forces, therefore less risk of electrical contacts or busbars being deformed or broken.

Electromagnetic effectsLess disturbances for measuring devices located near electrical circuits.

Economy by means of cascadingCascading is a technique directly derived from current limiting. Circuit breakers withbreaking capacities less than the prospective short-circuit current may be installeddownstream of a limiting circuit breaker. The breaking capacity is reinforced by thelimiting capacity of the upstream device.It follows that substantial savings can be made on downstream equipment andenclosures.

Current-limiting curvesThe current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves whichare a function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flowif no protection devices were installed):c The actual peak current (limited current),c Thermal stress (A2s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a

conductor with a resistance of 1 Ω.

ExampleWhat is the real value of a 150 kA rms prospective short-circuit (i.e. 330 kA peak)limited by an NS250L upstream ?Answer: 30 kA peak (see next page).

Maximum permissible cable stressesThe table below indicates the maximum permissible thermal stresses for cablesdepending on their insulation, conductor (Cu or Al) and their cross-sectional area(CSA). CSA values are given in mm2 and thermal stresses in A2s.CSA (mm2) 1.5 2.5 4 6 10

PVC Cu 2.97x104 8.26x104 2.12x105 4.76x105 1.32x106

Al 5.41x105

PRC Cu 4.10x104 1.39x105 2.92x105 6.56x105 1.82x106

Al 7.52x105

CSA (mm2) 16 25 35 50PVC Cu 3.4x106 8.26x106 1.62x107 3.31x107

Al 1.39x106 3.38x106 6.64x106 1.35x107

PRC Cu 4.69x106 1.39x107 2.23x107 4.56x107

Al 1.93x106 4.70x106 9.23x106 1.88x107

ExampleIs a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10 mm2 adequately protected by an NS160N?The table above indicates that the permissible stress is 1.32x106 A2s.All short-circuit currents at the point where an NS160N (Icu = 35 kA) is installed arelimited with a thermal stress less than 6 x 105 A2s (see next page).Cable protection is therefore ensured up to the limit of the breaking capacity of thecircuit breaker.

The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker isits aptitude to limit short-circuit currents.

ttc

Isc

prospectiveIsc

prospectiveIsc peak

prospectivecurrent

limited Iscpeak

actualcurrent

limitedIsc

The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range isdue to the rotating double-break technique (very rapid naturalrepulsion of contacts and the appearance of two arc voltagesin-series with a very steep wave front).

249

7

Voltage 380/415 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC

Current-limiting curves

Voltage 380/415 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC

Thermal-stress curves

TM16

TM25

NS250NS160NS100TM32…250

NS400

NS630L

H

H

LH

N

N

NL

NS1000L

NS630bNNS800NNS1000NNS1250NNS1600N

NS630bHNS800HNS1000HNS1250HNS1600H

NS630bLNS800LA

2s

2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300

23

5

108

109

23

5

23

5

23

5

2

105

3

5

106

107

150

kA rms



NS630bLNS800LNS1000L

NH

N

L

H

NS630NS400

NS250NS160NS100

TM25

TM16

N

TM32. . .250

2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300

6

4

10

20

40

100

200

30

5

78

50607080

300

kA rms

kA peak

NS250

L

HN

NS630H

N

L L

H

N

NS160

TM 25

TM 16

NS100TM 40…100

NS400TC150/250/400




2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300

23

5

108

109

23

5

23

5

2

3

5

2

105

3

5

106

107

150

A2s

kA rms



2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300

6

4

10

20

40

100

200

30

5

78

50607080

300

NS250

TM 16

HN

LN

NS630 NS400

H

LTC150/250/400

NS100TM40…100

TM 25NS160


kA rms

kA peak

250

8

251

8

Catalogue numbers

Presentation 8Functions and characteristics 16Installation recommendations 131Dimensions 155Connection 193Electrical diagrams 209Additional characteristics 237

NS80HMA 252

NSC100N 253

NS100 - 250 254NS400 - 630 266

NS630b - 1600 fixed manually operated 275

NS630b - 1600 fixed electrically operated 277

Accessories for NS630b - 1600 fixed devices 279NS630b - 1600 manually operated

withdrawable devices 281

NS630b - 1600 electrically operated

withdrawable devices 282Accessories for NS630b - 1600

withdrawable devices 282

Common accessories for NS630b - 1600

withdrawable devices 285NS1600b - 3200 fixed, front connected,manually operated device 287Accessories for NS1600b - 3200 288

Communication bus accessories and

display modules 289

NS100 to NS630 source changeover 291

More information about Schneider Electric 292

Compact NS

Catalogue numbers

252

8

long terminal shields (1 pair)3P

auxiliary switch (changeover)OF or SDOF or SD low level

voltage releasesAC voltage MX MN

42 V 50 Hz48 V 50 Hz110-130 V 50/60 Hz208 V 60 Hz220-240 V 50/60 Hz277 V 60 Hz380-415 V 50 Hz440-480 V 50/60 Hz

DC voltage MX MN24 V48 V110-125 V250 V

MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with time delaycomposed of: MN 250 V DC

delay unit 220-240 V 50/60 Hzdirect rotary handle

standard black handlered handle on yellow frontMCC conversion accessory

extended rotary handlestandard extended rotary handlered handle on yellow front

indication auxiliary2 early make contacts1 early-break contactwiring accessory for early-make contact (CAF)

flange mounted operating handlecable operated mechanism for flange handle

cable length 914mmcable length1524mmcable length 3048mm

flange handlegrey paint finishchrome finish

removable locking device for 3 padlocks100 identification labelsDIN rail plate

28034

2945029452

28080280812808928082280902808328084

28085280862808728088294212808829427

280502805128054

2805228053

280552805629336

293702931428040

2806928070280712806728072280682807328074

28075280762807728078

Compact NS80H-MA with built-in trip unit MA

Compact NS80H-MA(70 kA at 380-415 V)

Complete device

Accessories

Connection accessories

Electrical auxiliaries

Operating handles

Miscellaneous

28106281052810428103281022810128100

360203602136022

3700337004

Compact NS80H-MA fixed/FCrating 3P 3tMA1.5MA2.5MA6.3MA12.5MA25MA50MA80

253

8

Compact NSC100N fixed/FCrating 3P 3tTM16DTM20DTM25DTM32DTM40DTM50DTM63DTM70DTM80DTM100D

long terminal shields (1 pair)3P

auxiliary switch (changeover)OF or SDOF or SD low level


42 V 50 Hz48 V 50 Hz110-130 V 50/60 Hz208 V 60 Hz220-240 V 50/60 Hz277 V 60 Hz380-415 V 50 Hz440-480 V 50/60 Hz

DC voltage MX MN24 V48 V110-125 V250 V

direct rotary handlesstandard black handlered handle on yellow frontMCC conversion accessory

extended rotary handlesstandard extended rotary handlered handle on yellow front

indication auxiliary2 early make contacts1 early-break contactwiring accessory for early-make contact (CAF)

flange mounted operating handlecable operated mechanism for flange handle

cable length 914mmcable length1524mmcable length 3048mm


45mm standard front faceDIN rail plate100 labelsremovable locking device for 3 padlocks

28080280812808928082280902808328084

28085280862808728088

280502805128054

2805228053

280552805629336

28034

2945029452

Accessories



Complete deviceCompact NSC100N with built-in trip unit

Rotary handles

Miscellaneous

Compact NSC100N

28120281212812228123281242812528126281272812828129

2806928070280712806728072280682807328074

28075280762807728078

360203602136022

370033700428039280402931429370

Catalogue numbers

254

8

Compact NS100Hrating 1P 1d (Icu=25 kA at 220/240 V) 2P 2d (Icu=85 kA at 220/240 V and 25 kA at 380/415 V)TM16DTM20DTM25DTM30DTM40DTM50DTM63DTM80DTM100D

Compact NS160Hrating 1P 1d (Icu=25 kA at 220/240 V) 2P 2d (Icu=85 kA at 220/240 V and 25 kA at 380/415 V)TM125DTM160D

296152961829614296172961329616296122961129610

3061130610

295952959829594295972959329596295922959129590

Compact NS160N/160H 1P/2P with thermal magnetic trip unit TM-D

3059030589

Compact NS100Nrating 1P 1d (Icu=25 kA at 220/240 V) 2P 2d (Icu=85 kA at 220/240 V and 25 kA at 380/415 V)TM16DTM20DTM25DTM30DTM40DTM50DTM63DTM80DTM100D

Compact NS160Nrating 1P 1d (Icu=25 kA at 220/240 V) 2P 2d (Icu=85 kA at 220/240 V and 25 kA at 380/415 V)TM125DTM160D

Compact NS250Nrating 1P 1d (Icu=25 kA at 220/240 V)TM160DTM200DTM250D

296052960829604296072960329606296022960129600

3060130600

295852958829584295872958329586295822958129580

Compact NS100/160N 1P/2P, NS250 1P with thermal magnetic trip unit TM-D

Compact NS100/160/250N/H 1P/2P

Complete device

3058130580

315823158131580

255

8

Accessoriesauxiliary switch (changeover)

OF or SD

voltage releasesAC 50/60 Hz (V) MX MN

2448110/130200/240380/440525 (50 Hz)

DC (V) MX MN12243048125250

MN with time delay = MN 250 V CC220/240 V CA + time delay unit 220/240 V 50/60Hz

rear connections2 short2 long

bare cable connectorssnap-on, for cable 1,5 to 95 ; ≤ 160 A set of 2snap-on, for cable 10 to 185 ; ≤ 250 A set of 2

padsright-angle terminal extensions set of 2

straight terminal extensions set of 2

terminal shieldsshort (1 pair) 1Pshort (2 pairs) 2P (2x)

toggle locking device for 3 padlocksremovable

front-panel escutcheonswith toggles

LocksInstallation accessories

Connection accessories 2923529236

2924629247

29250

29251

2932029320

29370

29315

Electrical auxiliariesTwo pole only

OF = breaker open/closeSD = alarm switch

293842938529386293872938829389

293822939029391293922939329394

294042940529406294072940829409

2940229410294112941229413294142941429427

29450

Compact NS100/160/250N/H 1P/2PAccessories

Catalogue numbers

256

8

Compact NS100N fixed/FCrating 2P* 3P 4PTM16DTM25DTM32DTM40DTM50DTM63DTM80DTM100D

Compact NS160N fixed/FCrating 2P* 3P 4PTM80DTM100DTM125DTM160D

Compact NS250N fixed/FCrating 2P* 3P 4PTM125DTM160DTM200DTM250D

Compact NS100N fixed/FCrating 3P 4P40100



2977229770

307733077130770

3177231770

2963529634296372963329636296322963129630

30633306323063130630

31633316323163131630

Compact NS100/160/250N with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D

Complete device

Compact NS100/160/250N with electronic trip unit STR22SE

2964529644296472964329646296422964129640

30643306423064130640

31643316423164131640

Compact NS100N(25 kA at 380/415 V)Compact NS160/250N(36 kA at 380/415 V)

2962529624296272962329626296222962129620

30623306223062130620

31623316223162131620

2978229780

307833078130780

3178231780

* 3 pole frame sizeTM-G, MA and ME versions do not have acombined single reference for the frame and tripunit, they are detailed as a separate frame and tripon page .

257

8

Compact NS100H fixed/FCrating 3P 4PTM16DTM25DTM32DTM40DTM50DTM63DTM80DTM100D

Compact NS160H fixed/FCrating 3P 4PTM80DTM100DTM125DTM160D

Compact NS250H fixed/FCrating 3P 4PTM125DTM160DTM200DTM250D

Compact NS100H fixed/FCrating 3P 4P40100



Complete device

Compact NS100/160/250H with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D

Compact NS100/160/250H with electronic trip unit STR22SE

Compact NS100/160/250H(70 kA at 380/415 V)

2968529684296872968329686296822968129680

30683306823068130680

31683316823168131680

2980229800

308033080130800

3180231800

2967529674296772967329676296722967129670

30673306723067130670

31673316723167131670

2979229790

307933079130790

3179231790

TM-G, MA and ME versions do not have acombined single reference for the frame and tripunit, they are detailed as a separate frame and tripon page 259.

Catalogue numbers

258

8

Compact NS100/160/250L(150 kA at 380/415 V)Compact NS100/160/250NAswitch-disconnector

Complete device

Compact NS100/160/250L with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D

Compact NS100/160/250L with electronic trip unit STR22SE

2972529724297272972329726297222972129720

30723307223072130720

31723317223172131720

2982229820

308233082130820

3182231820

2971529714297172971329716297122971129710

30713307123071130710

31713317123171131710

2981229810

308133081130810

3181231810

TM-G, MA and ME versions do not have acombined single reference for the frame and tripunit, they are detailed as a separate frame and tripon page 259.

Compact NS100NA fixed/FCrating 3P 4P100



Complete device

Compact NS100/160/250NA switch-disconnector

29629

30629

31629

29639

30639

31639

For 1 sec and 3 sec short time withstand current(Icw) please refer to page 60.

Compact NS100L fixed/FCrating 3P 4PTM16DTM25DTM32DTM40DTM50DTM63DTM80DTM100D

Compact NS160L fixed/FCrating 3P 4PTM80DTM100DTM125DTM160D

Compact NS250L fixed/FCrating 3P 4PTM125DTM160DTM200DTM250D

Compact NS100L fixed/FCrating 3P 4P40100



259

8

Compact NS100/160/250N/H/LVigicompact NS100/160/250N/H/L

fixed/FC basic frame2P (3P frame) 3P 4P

NS100NNS100HNS100LNS160NNS160HNS160LNS250NNS250HNS250L

+ trip unitstandard protection: trip unit TM-Drating 2P (3P frame) 3P 4PTM16DTM25DTM32DTM40DTM50DTM63DTM80D (1)TM100D (1)TM80D (2)TM100D (2)TM125DTM160D (3)TM160D (4)TM200DTM250Dstandard protection: electronic trip unit SErating 3P 4PSTR22SE - 40 A (5)STR22SE - 100 A (5)STR22SE - 160 A (2)STR22SE - 250 A (4)type G protection: trip unit TM-Grating 2P (3P frame) 3P 4PTM16G (5)TM25G (5)TM40G (5)TM63G (5)type G protection: electronic trip unit GErating 3P 4PSTR22GE - 40 A (5)STR22GE - 100 A (5)STR22GE - 160 A (2)STR22GE - 250 A (4)motor protection: trip unit MArating 3P 4PMA2.5 (5)MA6.3 (5)MA12.5 (5)MA25 (5)MA50 (5)MA100 (5)MA150 (2)MA220 (4)motor protection: electronic trip unit MErating 3PSTR22ME - 10 A (5)STR22ME - 12.5 A (5)STR22ME - 20 A (5)STR22ME - 25 A (5)STR22ME - 40 A (5)STR22ME - 50 A (5)STR22ME - 80 A (5)STR22ME - 100 A (5)STR22ME - 150 A (2)STR22ME - 220 A (4)

options: SDTAM 110/240 V AC/CCSDTAM 24/48 V AC / 24/72 V DC

switch-disconnector NA 2P (3P frame) 3P 4P

NA (1)

NA (2)

29165291642916329162

290082900929010304083040930410314083140931410

290452904429047290432904629042290412904030443304423044130440314423144131440

29082290803048031480

29086290853048531485

291303051031510

2920230457

Comprising:

2942429430

(1) for NS100(2) for NS160/250(3) for NS160(4) for NS250(5) for NS100/160/250

29000

30400

31400

290252902429027290232902629022290212902030423304223042130420314223142131420

29145291442914329142

290032900429005304033040430405314033140431405

290352903429037290332903629032290312903030433304323043130430314323143131430

29072290703047031470

29155291542915329152

29076290753047531475

2912529124291232912229121291203050031500

29177291762917529174291732917229171291703052031520

2920130456

2920030456

Catalogue numbers

260

8

+ Vigi module3P 4P

ME type for NS100/160MH type for NS100/160 (220 to 440 V)MH type for NS250 (220 to 440 V)MH type for NS100/160 (440 to 550 V)MH type for NS250 (440 to 550 V)connection for a 4P Vigion a 3P breaker

2921229210315352921531533

292132921131536292163153429214


261

8


Fixed/RC device = fixed/FC device + RC kit3P 4P

short RC kitcomprising:

short RCs 3P 3x4P 4x

3P 4Pmixed RC kit

comprising:kit 3P short RCs 2x

long RCs 1xkit 4P short RCs 2x

long RCs 2x

Plug-in configuration = fixed/FC device + plug-in kit 2P (3P frame) 3P 4P

kit for Compactcomprising:

base 2P 1x3P 1x4P 1x

safety trip 3P/4P 1xshort terminal shields 3P 1x

4P 1xpower connections 2P 2x

3P 3x4P 4x

3P 4Pkit for Vigicompact

comprising:base 3P 1x

4P 1xsafety trip 3P/4P 1xshort terminal shields 3P 1x


4P 4xinsulation accessories

3P 4Plong terminal shields kit for plug-in base

comprising:adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x

4P (1 pair) 1xlong terminal shields 3P (1 pair) 1x

4P (1 pair) 1xphase barriers kit for plug-in base


4P (1 pair) 1xphase barriers set of 6 1x

Withdrawable configuration = fixed/FC device + withdrawable kit 2P (3P frame) 3P 4P


plug-in kit 2P 1x3P 1x4P 1x

fixed part of chassis 2P/3P/4P 1xmoving part of chassis 2P/3P/4P 1x


comprising:plug-in kit 3P 1x

4P 1xfixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1xmoving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x

Installation and connection

29288

29298

29237

29239

29289

29291

29332

29334

29299

29301

29238

2923529235

29240

29235292362923529236

29290

292652926629267292702932129322292682926829268

29292

29266292672927029321293222926929269

29333

2930629307293082930929311

293062930729328

29300

2928829289292902928229283

29302

29291292922928229283

Catalogue numbers

262

8

rear connections2 short 60mm2 long 115mm

bare cable connectorssnap-on, 1.5 to 95mm2 ; ≤ 160 A set of 3for cable : set of 4

10 to 185mm2 ; ≤ 250 A set of 3set of 4

voltage plug for 185mm2 bare cable connectorset of 2clips for bare-cable connector set of 10distribution connectors set of 3for six 1.5 to 35mm2 cables set of 4with phase barriers

"Polybloc" terminal block (for bare cable)160 A (40 °C) 6 cables S ≤ 10mm2

250 A (40 °C) 9 cables S ≤ 10mm2

terminal extensionsright-angle terminal extensions set of 3

set of 4straight terminal extensions set of 3

set of 4spreaders 3P

4Psupplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers

shrouded neutral link250A

crimp lugs for copper cablefor cable 120mm 2 set of 3

set of 4for cable 150mm 2 set of 3


set of 4supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers

crimp lugs for aluminium cablefor cable 150mm 2 set of 3


set of 4supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers

terminal shieldsshort (1 pair) 3 P

4 P

long (1 pair) 3 P4 P

insulation kit U 600 V(long terminal shields 3 P+ insulating screens) 4 P

phase barriers set of 6

2 insulating screens (fixed breaker) 3 P4 P

Accessories

Connection accessories(Cu or Al)

2923529236

2924229243292592926029348292412924829249

71007101

292612926229263292643156331564

NSNL250

292522925629253292572925429258

29504295052950629507

2932129322

2932329324

2932629327

29329

2933029331

Compact NS100/160/250N/H/L

Test kits test kitsmini test kit

portable test kitwiring kit (spare part)

43362

3454734546

263

8

auxiliary switch (changeover)OF or SD or SDE or SDVOF or SD or SDE or SDV low levelSDE adapter for trip unit TM or MA


24 V 50/60 Hz48 V 50/60 Hz110-130 V 50/60 Hz220-240 V 50/60 Hz208-277 V 60 Hz380-415 V 50 Hz440-480 V 60 Hz525 V 50 Hz-600 V 60 Hz

DC voltage MX MN12 V24 V30 V48 V60 V125 V250 V

MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with time delaycomposed of: MN 48 V DC

delay unit 48 V 50/60 HzMN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with time delaycomposed of: MN 250 V DC

delay unit of 220-240 V 50/60 Hzmotor mechanism modules

AC voltage MT100/160 MT25048-60 V 50/60 Hz110-130 V 50/60 Hz220-240 V 50/60 Hz208-277 V 60 Hz380-415 V 50/60 Hz440-480 V 60 Hz

DC voltage MT100/160 MT25024-30 V48-60 V110-130 V250 V

communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakersOF, SD and SDE communicating auxiliary switches for CompactNS100/160/250 (the SDE adapter SDE for thermal-magnetictrip units is included)

communicating "connected/disconnected" position indication switchesfor Compact NS circuit breakers

"connected /disconnected" position indication switchesfor Compact NS100/250

motor mechanism + communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakers

MT100/160 220-240V 50/60 Hz + communicating OF, SD, SDEfor Compact NS100/160

MT250 220-240V 50/60 Hz + communicating OF, SD, SDEfor Compact NS250

ammeter modulerating (A) 100 160 2503P4P

ammeter module I max.rating (A) 100 160 2503P

current transformer modulerating (A) 100 150 2503P4P

insulation monitoring module3P4P

voltage presence indicator

.

.

.

.

.


Accessories

2945529456

34849

2945729458


Indication andmeasurement modules

LV installation control andmonitoring

29384293852938629387

29388

29389

29382293902939129392293832939329394

294402943329434

29435

29436294372943829439

3055530556

34850

3055730558

294502945229451

29404294052940629407

29408

29409

29402294102941129412294032941329414294202941229426294222941429427

315483154031541

31542

31543315443154531546

29453

29296

29441

31549

3156531566

34851

3156731568

2945929460

29325

Catalogue numbers

264

8

293372933929341

293382934029343

293452934629336

29370

29371

293444194042888

29449

29354

29369

29344 (1)41950*42878*

92325**

Accessories

Rotary handles

Installation accessories

Flange mounted cableoperating handles

Interlocking

Locks

370053700637007370103701137012

3700337004

29315293162931729318

293192937529305

* Locking device 29344 is required in combination withRonis or Profolux keylocks - one per lock.

** Requires Castell lock type K form 4,Bolt projection = 19mm.Initial projection is flush.

direct rotary handlesstandard black handlered handle on yellow frontMCC conversion accessory

standard extended rotary handlestandard extended rotary handlered handle on yellow fronttelescopic handle for withdrawable device

accessoriesindication 1 early-break swithauxiliary 2 early-make switchesearly-make wiring terminal

cable operated mechanism for flange handlesfor 3 pole breakers cable length 914mm

cable length 1524mmcable length 3048mm

for 4 pole breakers cable length 914mmcable length 1524mmcable length 3048mm


toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocksby removable device

by fixed device

locking of the rotary handlekeylock adapter (keylock not included)keylock (keylock adapter Ronis 1351B.500not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z

locking of the motor mechanism moduleskeylock adapter + Ronis keylock (special)

interlocking mechanical for circuit breakerswith toggles

with rotary handles

interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handleskeylock adapter (keylock not included)1 set of 2 keylocks (1 key only, Ronis 1351B.500keylock adapter not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z(1) for only 1 devicecastell lock kit (locks not supplied) for fixed breaker with rotary handle

front-panel escutcheonstoggleVigi modulerotary handle, motor mechanism module or extended escutcheon, IP40Vigi module or ammeter IP405

toggle cover IP43sealing accessoriesDIN rail adapter

265

8


292652926629267292682926929270

2928229283

29284292852928629287

10 lever extensionsspare screws12 snap-in nuts (fixed/FC)

M6 for NS100N/H/LM8 for NS160/250N/H/L

100 identification labelssheet-metal enclosure IP40 for

Compact NS100/160/250Vigicompact NS100/160/250Cable extension box NS100/160Cable extension box NS250

2931329312

292343055429314

MGE1MGE1EMGEX160MGEX250

Accessories

Individual enclosures

Spare parts

Plug-in/withdrawableconfiguration accessories

29273292742927529272

292762927729271

auxiliary connections1 9-wire fixed connector (for base)1 9-wire moving connector (for circuit breaker)1 support for 2 moving connectors9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving)

plug-in base accessorieslong insulated terminals set of 3

set of 42 IP4 shutters for base

chassis accessoriesextended escutcheon toggle

Vigi modulelocking devices (keylock not included)2 position indicating switches (connected/disconnected)

parts of plug-in kitplug-in base FC/RC 2P

3P4P

set of 2 power connections for standardVigi module

safety trip for advanced openingparts of withdrawable kit

fixed part (for base) 3P/4Pmoving part (for circuit breaker)

Catalogue numbers

266

8

3P 4PCompact NS400N fixed/FC 150 A

250 A 400 A

Compact NS630N fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch

3P 4PCompact NS400N fixed/FC 150 A

250 A400 A

Compact NS630N fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch

3P 4PCompact NS400H fixed/FC 150 A

250 A400 A

Compact NS630H fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch

3P 4PCompact NS400H fixed/FC 150 A

250 A400 A


Compact NS400/630N(45 kA at 380/415 V)Compact NS400/630H(70 kA at 380/415 V)Applications above 525V - consult us.

Compact NS400/630H with electronic trip unit

Complete deviceCompact NS400/630N with electronic trip unit

32721327093269532895

32727327153270132901

32728327163270232902

32719327073269332893

32725327133269932899

32722327103269632896

32720327083269432894

32726327143270032900

STR23SE (U i 525 V)

STR53UE (U i 525 V)

STR23SE (U i 525 V)

STR53UE (U i 525 V)

267

8

STR23SE (U i 525 V)3P 4P

Compact NS400L fixed/FC 150 A250 A400A

Compact NS630L fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch

STR53UE (U i 525 V)3P 4P

Compact NS400L fixed/FC 150 A250 A400A

Compact NS630L fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch

MA3203P

Compact NS400H fixed/FCCompact NS400L fixed/FC

MA5003P

Compact NS630H fixed/FC, 45 mm pitchCompact NS630L fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch

Complete deviceCompact NS400/630L with electronic trip unit

32723327113269732897

32729327173270332903

3275032751

3295032951

32724327123269832898

32730327183270432904

Compact NS400/630H/L with electronic trip unit MA for motor protection

Compact NS400/630L(150 kA at 380/415 V)

Applications above 525V - consult us.

Catalogue numbers

268

8

3274232942

3274332943

32944

3275632956

Compact NS400N 1000 V (10 kA at 1150 V)

MP13P

Compact NS400H fixed/FCCompact NS630H fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch

MP23P

Compact NS400H fixed/FCCompact NS630H fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch

MP33P


3P 4PCompact NS400NA fixed/FCCompact NS630NA fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch

Compact equipped with insulation kit

STR23SP3P

Compact NS400N 1000 V fixed/FC 150 A250 A400A

Complete deviceCompact NS400/630H with trip unit MP for DC applications

Compact NS400/630NA switch-disconnector

Compact NS400/630H(70 kA at 380/415 V)Compact NS400/630NA(switch-disconnector)

326723267132670

3275732957

269

8

Comprising :

NS 400 extension with 150 and 250 A ratings:

3244232441

2942429430

29424294303244132434

324033240432405328033280432805

32420

32424

324253242632427

32430

32431

3245532453

323823239232383323933238432394

324083240932410328083280932810

324563245432457

323873239732388323983238932399

Note: The frame and the trip are supplied factory assembled as are the trip unit options, whereas the Vigi modules are supplied as loose items.

fixed/FC basic frame3P 4P

NS400NNS400HNS400LNS630NNS630HNS630L

+ trip unitelectronic trip units STR23SE

3P, 4PSTR23SE (U i 525 V)

electronic trip units STR53UE (basic offer)3P, 4P

STR53UE F (U i 525 V)

electronic trip unit STR53UE (with options)3P, 4P

STR53UE FT (U i 525 V)STR53UE FI (U i 525 V)STR53UE FTI (U i 525 V)

options: ZSI wiringCOM wiring

electronic trip unit STR43ME3P, 3t,

STR43ME Foptions: SDTAM 110/240 V AC/DC

SDTAM 24/48 V AC / 24/72 V DCSTR43ME FI

options: SDTAM 110/240 V AC/DCSDTAM 24/48 V AC / 24/72 V DC

COM wiringExchange battery option for STR53UE or STR43ME

+ Vigi module3P 4P

type MB 220 to 440 V440 to 550 V

connection for a 4P Vigion a 3P breaker

fixed/FC basic frame3P 4P

NS400N 150 A250 A

NS400H 150 A250 A

NS400L 150 A250 A

All the above trip units can be included in this offer.

Catalogue numbers

270

8

Compact NS400/630N/H/L

fixed/RC device = fixed/FC device + RC kit3P 4P

mixed RC kitcomprising:

kit 3P short RCs 2xlong RCs 1x

kit 4P short RCs 2xlong RCs 2x

fixed/FC configuration 52.5 mm or 70 mm pitch = fixed FC configuration 45 mm pitch + spreadersPitch of all Compact and Vigicompact NS400/630/N/H/L is 45 mm.A set of spreaders is available for connection: fixed front connections or withdrawable with pitch of 52.5 mm or 70 mm.upline or downline clearance

52.5 mm 3P4P

70 mm 3P4P

plug-in configuration = fixed/FC device + plug-in kit3P 4P


base 3P 1x4P 1x



4P 4x3P 4P

kit for Vigicompactcomprising:

base 3P 1x4P 1x



4P 4x

withdrawable configuration = fixed/FC device + withdrawable kit3P 4P


plug-in kit 3P 1x4P 1x

fixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1xmoving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x


comprising:plug-in kit 3P 1x

4P 1xfixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1xmoving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x

insulation accessories3P 4P

long terminal shields kit for plug-in base and withdrawable configurationcomprising:

adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x4P (1 pair) 1x

long terminal shields 3P (1 pair) 1x4P (1 pair) 1x

3P 4Pphase barriers kit for plug-in base and withdrawable configuration


4P (1 pair) 1xphase barriers set of 6 1x

Installation and connection

32477

32538

32540

32542

32544

32588

32591

32478

32475324763247532476

32490324913249232493

32539

32516325173252032562325633251832518

32541

32516325173252032562325633251932519

32543

32538325393253232533

32545

32540325413253232533

32589

32584325853258632587

32592

325843258532571

.

Note: If any internal accessories are required for plug-ins and withdrawable devices, add the necessary auxiliary connections (see plug-in/withdrawable configuration accessories.

271

8


rear connections2 short2 long

bare cable connectorsfor 1 cable from set of 335 to 300mm2 set of 4

for 2 cable from set of 385 to 240mm2 set of 4Voltage plug for bare cable connector set of 2

terminal extensionsright-angle terminal extensions set of 3

set of 4edgewise pads set of 3

set of 4spreaders 52,5 mm 3P

4P70 mm 3P

4Psupplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers

crimp lugs for copper cablefor cable set of 3240mm2 set of 4for cable set of 3300mm2 set of 4supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers

crimp lugs for aluminium cablefor cable set of 3240mm2 set of 4for cable set of 3300mm2 set of 4supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers

terminal shieldsshort, 45 mm (1 pair) 3 P

4 Plong, 45 mm (1 pair) 3 P

4 Plong for spreaders, 52.5 mm (1 pair, 3 Psupplied with insulating plate) 4 P

Insulation Kit U 600 V45 mm pole distance 3 P

4 Pfor spreaders, 52,5 mm 3 P(long terminal shields + insulding plate) 4 Pphase barriers set of 6

2 insulating screens 52,5 mm pitch 3 P(fixed breaker) 4 P

70 mm pitch 3 P4 P

shrouded neutral link630A

Connection accessories(Cu or Al)

Accessories

3247532476

3247932480

324813248229348

3248432485324863248732490324913249232493

32500325013250232503

32504325053250632507

325623256332564325653258232583

3258032581325823258332570

32576325773257832579

NSNL630

Catalogue numbers

272

8

32848

3285532856

34853

3285732858

3265932660

32566

3265532656

34852

3265732658

auxiliary switch (changeover)OF or SD or SDE or SDVOF or SD or SDE or SDV low level


24 V 50/60 Hz48 V 50/60 Hz110-130 V 50/60 Hz220-240 V 50/60 Hz208-277 V 60 Hz380-415 V 50 Hz440-480 V 60 Hz525 V 50 Hz-600 V 60 Hz

DC voltage MX MN12 V24 V30 V48 V60 V125 V250 V

MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with time delaycomposed of: MN 48 V DC

delay unit 48 V 50/60 HzMN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with time delaycomposed of: MN 250 V DC

delay unit 220/240 V 50/60 Hzmotor mechanism modules

AC voltage MT400 MT63048-60 V 50/60 Hz110-130 V 50/60 Hz220-240 V 50/60 Hz208-277 V 60 Hz380-415 V 50 Hz440-480 V 60 Hz

DC voltage MT400 MT63024-30 V48-60 V110-130 V250 V

motor mechanism accessorieslocking device with Ronis/Profolux keylock (not included)operations counter

communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakersOF, SD and SDE communicating auxiliary switchesfor Compact NS400/630

communicating "connected/disconnected" position indication switchesfor Compact NS circuit breakers

"connected /disconnected" position indication switchesfor Compact NS400/630

motor mechanism + communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakers



ammeter modulerating (A) 400 6303P4P

ammeter module I max.rating (A) 400 6303P

current transformer modulerating (A) 400 6003P4P

insulation monitoring module3P4P

voltage presence indicator

Accessories


Indication andmeasurement modules

LV installation control andmonitoring (Digipact)

2945029452

29404294052940629407

29408

29409

29402294102941129412294032941329414294202941229426294222941429427

328393284032841

3284232847

32843328443284532846

3264932648

32551

29296

32652

29384293852938629387

29388

29389

29382293902939129392293832939329394

326393264032641

3264232647

32643326443264532646

273

8


direct rotary handlestandard black handlered handle on yellow frontMCC conversion accessory

extended rotary handlestandard extended rotary handlered handle on yellow fronttelescopic handle for withdrawable device

indication auxiliary1 early-break switch2 early-make switches

cable operated mechanism for flange handlesfor 3 pole breakers cable length 914mm

cable length 1524mmcable length 3048mm

for 4 pole breakers cable length 914mmcable length 1524mmcable length 3048mm


toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocksby removable device

by fixed device

locking of the rotary handlekeylock adapter (keylock not included)keylock (keylock adapter Ronis 1351B.500not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z

locking of the motor mechanism moduleskeylock adapter (keylock not included)keylock (keylock adapter Ronis 1351B.500not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z

interlocking mechanical for circuit breakerswith toggles

with rotary handles

interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handleskeylock adapter (keylock not included)1 set of 2 keylocks (1 key only, Ronis 1351B.500keylock adapter not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z(1) for only 1 device

manual source changeoverCastell lock kit (locks not supplied) for fixed breaker with rotary handle

templates for front panel cut-outstoggleVigi modulerotary handle, motor mechanism module or extended escutcheon, IP40Vigi module or ammeter IP405

toggle cover IP45sealing accessories

325973259932606

325983260032603

3260529346

Accessories

Rotary handles


Locks

Interlocking

29370

32631

326044194042888

326494194042888

32614

32621

32604 (1)4195042878

370053700637007370103701137012

3700337004

32556293163255829318

3256029375

92325** Requires Castell lock type K, form 4.Bolt projection = 19mm, initial projection is flush.

Catalogue numbers

274

8

auxiliary connections1 fixed withdrawable part with 9 wires (for base)1 moving withdrawable part with 9 wires (for circuit breaker)1 support for 3 moving connectors9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving)

plug-in base accessorieslong insulated terminals set of 3

set of 42 IP4 shutters for base

chassis accessoriesextended escutcheon toggle

Vigilocking devices (keylock not included)2 position indicating switches (connected/disconnected)

parts of plug-in kitplug-in base FC/RC 3P

4Pset of 2 power connections for standard

Vigisafety trip for advanced opening

parts of withdrawable kitfixed part (for base) 3P/4Pmoving part (for circuit breaker)

Plug-in/withdrawableconfiguration accessories

test kitsmini test kit

portable test kitwiring kit (spare part)

Accessories

Individual enclosures

Spare parts 29314324343255332552

MGE2MGE2EMGEX630

Test kits 43362

3454734546

29273325233252529272

325263252732521

32534292852928629287

3251632517325183251932520

3253232533

100 identification labelsbattery for STR43ME or STR53UElever extensionscrewbagsheet-metal enclosure IP40 for

Compact NS400/630Vigicompact NS400/630Cable extension box NS400/630

275

8

NS630b to NS1600 fixedmanually operated

Compact NS type N

Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS630b 33460 33463

NS800 33466 33469

NS1000 33472 33475

NS1250 33478 33480

NS1600 33482 33484

Compact NS type H

Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS630b 33461 33464

NS800 33467 33470

NS1000 33473 33476

NS1250 33479 33481

NS1600 33483 33485

Compact NS type L

Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS630b 33462 33465

NS800 33468 33471

NS1000 33474 33477

Compact NS type N

Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS630b 33546 33549

NS800 33552 33555

NS1000 33558 33561

NS1250 33564 33566

NS1600 33568 33570

Compact NS type H

Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS630b 33547 33550

NS800 33553 33556

NS1000 33559 33562

NS1250 33565 33567

NS1600 33569 33571

Compact NS type L

Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS630b 33548 33551

NS800 33554 33557

NS1000 33560 33563

Front-connected circuit breakerwith Micrologic 2.0 control unit

Complete device

Front-connected circuit breakerwith Micrologic 5.0 control unit

Compact NS type NA 3P 4P

NS630b 33486 33491

NS800 33487 33492

NS1000 33488 33493

NS1250 33489 33494

NS1600 33490 33495

Front-connectedswitch-disconnector

Note: Select in addition the connection accessories, device accessories and auxiliaries, control unit accessories and communications options, as required.

Catalogue numbers

276

8

Front connection3P 4P

630/1000 A Top 33598 33608

Bottom 33599 33609

1250 A Top 33600 33610

630/1000 A Bottom 33601 33611

type L

1600 A Top 33602 33612

Bottom 33603 33613

Rear connection3P 4P

Vertical Top 33604 33614

Bottom 33605 33615

Horizontal Top 33606 33616

Bottom 33607 33617

Connections for circuit breakersand switch disconnectors

Compact NS type NA3P 4P

NS630b 33420 33421

NS800 33422 33423

NS1000 33424 33425

NS1250 33426 33427

NS1600 33428 33429

Basic switch disconnector

Compact NS type NIcu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS630b 33220 33224

NS800 33230 33234

NS1000 33240 33244

NS1250 33250 33254

NS1600 33260 33264

Compact NS type HIcu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS630b 33221 33225

NS800 33231 33235

NS1000 33241 33245

NS1250 33251 33255

NS1600 33261 33265

Compact NS type LIcu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS630b 33222 33226

NS800 33232 33236

NS1000 33242 33246

+ Micrologic control unitsWithout ammeter With ammeter

(option A)

Basic protection 2.0 33504 33505

Selective protection 5.0 33511 33512

Selective + earth-fault protection 6.0 33513

Selective + earth-leakage protection 7.0 33514

Basic circuit breakerDevice based on separate components

To order a complete device, order:

A basic circuit breaker and a Micrologic control unit, or a basic switch disconnector,

Connections,

Accessories (for the device, the connection, the control unit) and communication option as required.

NS630b to NS1600 fixedmanually operated (cont.)

277

8

Basic switch disconnector


NS630b 33270 33274

NS800 33280 33284

NS1000 33290 33294

NS1250 33300 33304

NS1600 33310 33314


NS630b 33271 33275

NS800 33281 33285

NS1000 33291 33295

NS1250 33301 33305

NS1600 33311 33315

Compact NS type LIcu = 150 kA at 220/415V 3P 4P

NS630b 33272 33276

NS800 33282 33286

NS1000 33292 33296


(option A)






NS630b 33440 33441

NS800 33442 33443

NS1000 33444 33445

NS1250 33446 33447

NS1600 33448 33449


NS630b to NS1600 fixedelectrically operated

Note: The characteristics ofthe motor mechanismmodule for electricaloperation are specifiedseparately by selecting apart number from the tableat the bottom of this page.

Note: The characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electricaloperation are specified separately by selecting a part number from the table atthe bottom of this page.

Catalogue numbers

278

8

Front connection3P 4P

630/1000 A Top 33598 33608

Bottom 33599 33609

1250 A Top 33600 33610

630/1000 Bottom 33601 33611

A type L

1600 A Top 33602 33612

Bottom 33603 33613

Rear connection

3P 4P

Vertical Top 33604 33614

Bottom 33605 33615


Bottom 33607 33617


NS630b to NS1600 fixedelectrically operated (cont.)



Connections,


AC 50/60 Hz DC

Standard Communicating Standard Communicating

48 V 33691 33698 24-30 V 33690 33697

100-130 V 33687 33694 48-60 V 33691 33698

220-240 V 33688 33695 100-130 V 33692 33699

380-415 V 33689 33696 200-250 V 33693 33700

Motor mechanism module

279

8

Front connection Rear connection

Bare-cable connectors + 1 connector shield for 4 cables (240 mm2)3P (3 parts) 33640

4P (4 parts) 33641

1 long connection shield3P 33628

4P 33629

Vertical-connection adapters3P (3 parts) 33642

4P (4 parts) 33643

Cable lug adapters3P (3 parts) 33644

4P (4 parts) 33645

Interphase barriers3P/4P top (3 parts) 33646 3P/4P top (3 parts) 33648

3P/4P bottom (3 parts) 33646 3P/4P bottom (3 parts) 33648

Arc chute screen

3P 33596

4P 33597

Brackets for mounting on a horizontal surface3P/4P (2 parts) 33647

Spreaders3P 33622 3P 33622

4P 33623 4P 33623

Cable lug kits240 mm2 3P (6 lug kit) 33013

4P (8 lug kit) 33014

300 mm2 3P (6 lug kit) 33015

4P (8 lug kit) 33016

Accessories for NS630b toNS1600 fixed devices


Indication contactsOF, SD, SDE 6 A - 240 V 29450 (*)

Low level 29452 (*)

Up to 3 OF, 1 SD and 1 SDE can be connected (the SDE contact is standard forelectrically operated devices).


Instantaneous voltage releases MX MN Delay unit for MN

R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable)

12 V DC 33658

24-30 V AC/DC 33659 33668

48-60 V AC/DC 33660 33669 33680

100-130 V AC/DC 33661 33670 33684 33681

200-250 V AC/DC 33662 33671 33685 33682

240-277 V AC 33663

380-480 V AC 33664 33673 33683

(*) see Compact NS.

Catalogue numbers

280

8

Accessories for NS630b toNS1600 fixed devices (cont.)

Removable toggle locking systemLocking by 3 padlocks 44936

Fixed toggle locking systemLocking by 3 padlocks 32631

Locking for manually operated devices

Devices with direct rotary handlesHandle Black 33863

Red/yellow front 33864

Conversion accessory CNOMO 33866

Locking by keylocks Ronis Profalux

OFF position 33870 33869

OFF and ON positions 33872 33871

Keylock kit (without keylocks) 33868 33868

Mechanical interlockingFor 2 devices with extended rotary handles 33890

Devices with extended rotary handlesHandle Black 33878

Red/yellow front 33879

Telescopic (for chassis-mounted devices) 33880

Control accessories2 advanced indication contacts (6 A - 240 V)

Early break 33882

Early make 33883

Rotary handle for manually operated devices

Pushbutton lockingBy transparent cover + padlocks 33897

Locking in OFF positionBy Profalux keylocks 1 lock 33902

1 lock + 1 lock with same key profile 33904

By Ronis keylocks 1 lock 33903


Keylock kit (without keylocks) For Profalux keylocks 33898

For Ronis keylocks 33899

For Kirk keylocks 47517

For Castell keylocks 47518

Operation counter CDM33895

Locking and accessories for electrically operated devices

Escutcheon (small cut-out) for manually operated device with toggle 33717

Escutcheon for: - device with toggle (large cutout) 33718

- device with rotary handle

- electrically operated device


281

8


NS630b 33320 33324

NS800 33330 33334NS1000 33340 33344

NS1250 33350 33354

NS1600 33360 33364


NS630b 33321 33325

NS800 33331 33335

NS1000 33341 33345

NS1250 33351 33355

NS1600 33361 33365


NS630b 33322 33326

NS800 33332 33336

NS1000 33342 33346


(option A)





Basic circuit breaker

NS630b to NS1600 manuallyoperated withdrawable devices

Device based on separate components

Basic switch disconnector Compact NS type NA

3P 4P

NS630b 33430 33431

NS800 33432 33433

NS1000 33434 33435

NS1250 33436 33437

NS1600 33438 33439

Basic chassis andconnections

Chassis3P 4P

630/1250 A 33722 33725

1600 A 33723 33726

630/1000 A type L

+ connection3P 4P

Front connectionTop 33727 33733

Bottom 33728 33734

Rear connectionVertical Top 33729 33735

Bottom 33730 33736


Bottom 33732 33738



Chassis and connections,


Catalogue numbers

282

8

Chassis3P 4P

630/1250 A 33722 33725

1600 A 33723 33726

630/1000 A type L

+ connection3P 4P

Front connectionTop 33727 33733

Bottom 33728 33734

Rear connectionVertical Top 33729 33735

Bottom 33730 33736


Bottom 33732 33738

Basic switch disconnectors

NS630b to NS1600 electricallyoperated withdrawable devices


NS630b 33370 33374

NS800 33380 33384

NS1000 33390 33394

NS1250 33400 33404

NS1600 33410 33414


NS630b 33371 33375

NS800 33381 33385

NS1000 33391 33395

NS1250 33401 33405

NS1600 33411 33415


NS630b 33372 33376

NS800 33382 33386

NS1000 33392 33396


(option A)






Note: The characteristics ofthe motor mechanismmodule for electricaloperation are specifiedseparately by selecting apart number from the tableat the bottom of this page.


NS630b 33450 33451

NS800 33452 33453

NS1000 33454 33455

NS1250 33456 33457

NS1600 33458 33459

The characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical operation are specifiedseparately by selecting a part number from the table at the bottom of this page.

Chassis and connections



Connections,


AC 50/60 Hz DC

Standard Communicating Standard Communicating

48 V 33831 33838 24-30 V 33830 33837

100-130 V 33827 33834 48-60 V 33831 33838

220-240 V 33828 33835 100-130 V 33832 33839

380-415 V 33829 33836 200-250 V 33833 3384-0

Motor mechanism module

283

8

Vertical-connection adapters for front-connected chassis3P (3 parts) 33642

4P (4 parts) 33643

Cable lug adapters for front-connected chassis3P (3 parts) 33644

4P (4 parts) 33645

Interphase barriers for rear-connected chassis3P/4P (3 parts) 33768

Spreaders for front-connected and rear-connected chassis3P (3 parts) 33622

4P (4 parts) 33623

Cable lug kits 240 mm2 3P (6 lug kit) 33013

4P (8 lug kit) 33014

300 mm2 3P (6 lug kit) 33015

4P (8 lug kit) 33016

Accessories for NS630b toNS1600 withdrawable devices


Auxiliary terminal shield (CB) 3P 33763

4P 33764

Safety shutters (VO) 3P 33765

4P 33766

Chassis accessories

SD trip indication contact for manually operated devices6 A - 240 V 33800

Low level 33803

SDE fault indication contact for manually operated devices6 A - 240 V 33799

Low level 33802

OF ON/OFF indication contacts 6 A - 240 V 33801

Low level 33804

Up to 3 OF contacts per device

CE, CD, CT carriage switches

6 A - 240 V 33170

Low level 33171

Up to 3 CE, 1 CT, 2 CD per device




12 V DC 33658

24-30 V AC/DC 33659 33668

48-60 V AC/DC 33660 33669 33680

100-130 V AC/DC 33661 33670 33684 33681

200-250 V AC/DC 33662 33671 33685 33682

240-277 V AC 33663

380-480 V AC 33664 33673 33683Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone

3 wire terminal (30 parts) 47071

6 wire terminal (10 parts) 47072

Jumpers (10 parts) 47900

Catalogue numbers

284

8

Keylocking in disconnected position

Profalux 1 lock 33773


2 locks (with different key profiles) 33775

Ronis 1 lock 33776


2 locks (with different key profiles) 33778

Option for locking in connected, disconnected and test positions 33779

Keylock kit (without keylocks)Profalux 33769

Ronis 33770

Castell 33771

Kirk 33772

Door interlockRight side of chassis (VPECD) 33786

Left side of chassis (VPECG) 33787

Racking interlock (VPOC)33788

Mismatch protection (VDC)33767

Accessories for NS630b toNS1600 withdrawable devices (cont.)

Chassis locking

Escutcheon

33857

Transparent cover for escutcheon33859

Blanking plate33858


285

8

Common accessories for NS630bto NS1600 withdrawable devices

For fixed devices

Manually operated Electrically operated

Modbus COM 33702 33708

Digipact COM 33705 33711

For moving partManually operated Electrically operated

Modbus COM 33842 33848

Digipact COM 33845 33851

+ chassis

Modbus 33852 33852

Digipact 33855 33855

Communications options

Long-time rating plug (enhanced accuracy by limiting the setting range)Standard 0.4 to 1 x Ir 33542

Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 x Ir 33543

High setting 0.8 to 1 x Ir 33544

Without long-time protection OFF 33545

External sensorsExternal sensor for neutral + earth-fault protection (TCE)

CT rating: 400/1600 A 33576

Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection280 mm x 115 mm 33577

Source ground return (SGR) earth fault protectionExternal sensor (SGR) 33579

MDGF summing module 48891

External power supply module24-30 V DC 54440

48-60 V DC 54441

125 V DC 54442

110 V AC 54443

220 V DC 54444

380 V DC 54445


Mini test kit33594

Portable test kit33595

Test equipment

Toggle extension

46996

Spare parts

Catalogue numbers

286

8

Common accessories for NS630bto NS1600 withdrawable devices(cont.)

Interlocking using connecting rods for Compact electrically operated devicesComplete assembly with 2 adaptation fixtures + rods2 Compact fixed devices 33910

2 Compact withdrawable devices 33913

Interlocking using cables for Compact electrically operated devicesComplete assembly with 2 adaptation fixtures + cables

2 Compact fixed devices 33911

2 Compact withdrawable devices 33914

1 Compact fixed + 1 Compact withdrawable device 33915

Mechanisal interlocking for source changeover

287

8


Switch disconnector

NS1600b to NS3200 fixed,front-connected,manually operated device

Compact NS type N

Icu = 85 kA to 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS1600b 34000 34003

NS2000 34006 34009

NS2500 34012 34015

NS3200 34018 34021

Compact NS type HIcu = 120 kA to 220/415 V 3P 4P

NS1600b 34001 34004

NS2000 34007 34010

NS2500 34013 34016

NS3200 34019 34022


(option A)






NS1600b 34024 34025

NS2000 34027 34028

NS2500 34030 34031

NS3200 34033 34034

1600/2500 A 3P (3 parts) 33975

4P (4 parts) 33976

Note: Standard for 3200 A.

Indication contacts

OF, SD, SDE 6 A - 240 V 29450

Low level 29452

Up to 3 OF, 1 SD an d 1 SDE can be connected.

Circuit breaker

Optional verticalconnection adaptor



12 V DC 33658

24-30 V AC/DC 33659 33668

48-60 V AC/DC 33660 33669 33680

100-130 V AC/DC 33661 33670 33684 33681

200-250 V AC/DC 33662 33671 33685 33682

240-277 V AC 33663

380-480 V AC 33664 33673 33683

Removable toggle locking systemLocking by 3 padlocks 33996

Fixed toggle locking system

Locking by 3 padlocks 32631

(*) see Compact NS.

Locking

Catalogue numbers

288

8

Modbus COM 33986

Digipact COM 33987

Communications options

Long-time rating plug (enhanced accuracy by limiting the setting range)Standard 0.4 to 1 x Ir 33542

Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 x Ir 33543

High setting 0.8 to 1 x Ir 33544

Without long-time protection OFF 33545

External sensorsExternal sensor for neutral + earth-fault protection (TCE)CT rating: 1000/4000 A 34026

Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection470 mm x 160 mm 33578

Source ground return (SGR) earth fault protectionExternal sensor (SGR) 33579

MDGF summing module 48891

External power supply module24-30 V DC 54440

48-60 V DC 54441

125 V DC 54442

110 V AC 54443

220 V DC 54444

380 V DC 54445


Mini test kit33594

Portable test kit33595

Test equipment

Toggle extension

NS3200 toggle extension for replacement 33997

Spare parts

Accessories for NS1600b toNS3200

289

8

Communication bus accessoriesand display modules

RS485 Modbus junction blockCJB306: 6 SubD 9 pins connectors junction block 50963

RS485 Modbus connectorCSD309: 9 pins SubD with screw terminals 50964

RS485 Modbus cablesCDM303: display module pre-wired cable, 3 m length 50960

CCP303: Masterpact or Compact pre-wired cable

(4 RS485 wires + 2 power wires) 3 m length 50961

CCR301: RS485 roll cable

(2 RS485 wires + 2 power wires) 60 m length 50965

RS485 Modbus pre-wired system

Data concentrator DC150Auxiliary supply voltage

110-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz and 115-125 V DC 50823

Junction blockJunction block for internal Bus 50778

CablesCable for internal bus 20-meter roll (0.75 mm 2) 50779

100-meter roll (0.75 mm2) 50780

Digipact Bus pre-wired system

RS485/RS232 (ACE909) 12 V DC power supply included 50786

RS485/RS232 (1) TSX SCA72

RS485/Ethernet (1) 174 CEV 300-10

RS485/Ethernet (SMS compatible) (2) 3050 EGW2

(1) SeeTelemecanique catalogue.

(2) See PowerLogic catalogue.

Converter

Catalogue numbers

290

8

Manual source changeovermechanical interlocking

for toggle controlled circuit-breakers NS100...250NS400...630

for rotary handled circuit-breakers NS100...630

key lock interlockingfor rotary handled or remote controlled circuit breakers2 locks, 1 key Ronis 1351.500

Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z

plate + IVE source /source 24/250 V DC 48/415 V AC 50/60 Hz"normal" "replacement" (identical voltages)

440 V 60 HzNS100...250 /NS100...250composed of: plate

IVE (1)auxiliary switches 2 OF + 2 SDEback sockets option add:

only long RC (2) (2)plug in base option add:

plug in kit (2) (2)NS400...630 /NS100...630

composed of: plateIVE (1)

auxiliary switches 2 OF + 2 SDEback sockets option add:

only long RC (2) (2)plug in base option add:

plug in kit (2) (2)adaptator kit for NS100...250

control unit option 220/240 V AC 380/415 V AC50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

440 V 60 HzACP + control unit BA

composed of: plate ACP (1)control unit BA (1)

ACP + control unit UAcomposed of: plate ACP (1)

control unit UA (1)ACP + control unit UA150 (communication option)

composed of: plate ACP (1)control unit UA150 (1)

wiring cable between BA/UA and ACP/IVE(1) the supply voltages BA/UA control unit, ACP plate, IVE and the remote control must be identical whatever the source changeover type.(2) see products pages.

downstream coupling accessories"normal"/"replacement"NS100...250/NS100...250 250 A 3 P

4 PNS400...630/NS400...630 630 A 3 P

4 P

29358293593261932620

Source changeover


Remote controlled source changeover

Compact NS100 to NS630

2935432614

29369

4195042878

293502934929352

4 x 29450

293512934929356

4 x 29450

326113260929356

4 x 29450

1 x 32618

326103260929352

4 x 29450

1 x 32618

29470293632937629472293632937829474293632937929368

29471293642937729473293642938029475293642938129368

291

8

Typical composition of remote controlled source changeoverremote controlled source changeover

1 normal device N (1)+ 1 replacement device R (2)+ 2 remote controls (3)+ 1 plate with interlocking (4) with IVE (5) and its wiring (8)+ 2 plug-in kits (if plug-in version)+ 1 adaptor kit for NS100...250plug-in (if NS400...630 with NS100...250)+ auxilary switches (6)2 x (1 OF + 1 SDE) for Compact NS100...630+ 1 downstream coupling accessory (7) for Compact NS100...630 (option)+ long RC (if back connection)

IVE voltages and remote controls are identical.associated control unit1 source changeover without associated control unit+ 1 ACP (9) with BA control unit (10)or + 1 ACP (9) with UA control unit (11)or + 1 ACP (9) with UA150 control unit (11)note: the cable (12) between ACP and BA/UA must be producedby the person doing the installation

IVE voltages + remote control + ACP + BA or UA are identical.

292

9

293

9

More information about

Schneider ElectricCompact NS

Presentation 8Installation recommendations 131Dimensions 155Connection 193Electrical diagrams 209Additional characteristics 237Catalogue numbers 251

9

Get more with the world’spower and control specialist

Schneider Electric’s expertise is founded on theskills of its four international brands –

Merlin Gerin, Modicon, Square D andTelemecanique and has accumulated over 100years experience in the electrical industry.

We have established an enviable reputation as aworld and UK leader in the distribution and controlof electrical power. We regard our customers ascommercial partners; technical specialists who,

like us, demand the highest standards ofexcellence in terms of products and projects andservices. We are proud to provide the solutionsthat meet their needs.

Schneider Electric also operates the largest, dedicatedsales force in the UK electrical industry.Sales Engineers have specialist expertise and anunderstanding of the customer needs within each ofthe following market sectors:

Commercial and Industrial Buildings

Energy and Infrastructure

Industrial Processes and Machines

9

Schneider Electric means greater comfort, lower operating costs and enhanced safety.

Related industries

Retail

Education

Health

Entertainment centres

Offices

Warehouses

Agriculture

Factory

Private residential

Public residential

The real reason for putting technology into buildings is

to simplify tasks, enhance safety and improve the

quality of life. Schneider Electric knows this and has

created attractive, functional products for the

residential building sector. Well-being and comfort are

key concepts in this area.

The same objectives apply to commercial

buildings such as offices, hotels, shopping

centres, hospitals, schools and care

facilities for the elderly. Schneider Electric

offer a wide range of solutions in the area

of building management services and uses

its expertise in all of these buildings to

protect people and equipment.

Principal customers in the construction market

Contracting authorities

Main contractors

Building engineers

9

Energy

Schneider Electric is involved in the entire electrical distribution chain from power plants

to end users. Customer demand for complete availability, uncompromising quality and

absolute safety has made the search for excellence our key mission.

Today, electrical substation and network protection, monitoring and control are highly

effective in reducing outage time.

Proven technologies offer a wide range of simple, efficient and flexible solutions for

optimised, step-by-step investments.

Infrastructure

Schneider Electric is involved in

developing infrastructure and

transportation systems around the world.

In areas where no failures can be

tolerated, such as road and rail equipment,

harbour installations and airports,

Schneider Electric provides solutions in

electrical distribution, control and

monitoring, automation and supervision.

Key markets

Electricity distribution

Water

Rail

Airports

Seaports

Defence

Gas

Telecommunications

Road

Principal customers in the electricpower market

Power suppliers involved ingeneration and distribution

Utility companies

Major contractors

Large end user sites

Government departments

9

Schneider Electric focus on performance in all areas of industry.

Our products and services adapt to each specific business and

environment, from manufacturing and production lines to

continuous processes in a wide variety of industries, such as:

Automotive

Pharmaceutical

Petrochemical

Food and beverage

Oil/steel/coal

Packaging

Material handling

Principal customers in the industry market

Large multinational industrial groups

Small and medium-sized manufacturers

Original equipment manufacturers

System integrators

Contractors/panel builders

Electrical equipment distributors

9

Schneider Electric Services - complete life cycle support

Schneider Electric offers you the complete solution. A comprehensive array of fully

integrated, high quality products, supported by a premium services offer.

Complete life cycle support encompasses the total ‘services’ needs of customers.

This ranges across a broad spectrum of support services, from initial conceptual design,

through to crucial After Sales support.

To complement the high standard of

services, Schneider Electric also offer a

comprehensive programme of 48 training

courses intended to increase customers’

product knowledge and associated skills.

End of life cycle

Retrofit

Remote monitoring

Technical support

Adaptation

Equipment surveyModernise Design

Network studies

System layout and design

Project management

Energy efficiency

Application studies

Operate

Spares and repairs

24 hour a day assistance

Extended warranty

Preventative maintenance

Install

Equipment supply

Installation

Test

Commissioning

Training

Complete lifecycle support

Merlin Gerin is a world leader in the manufacture andsupply of high, medium and low voltage products for thedistribution, protection, control and management ofelectrical systems. Its quality products, solutions andservices are focused on the needs of both the commercialand industrial sectors.

Modicon is a world leader in high technologyprogrammable controllers (PLCs) and motion controlsystems used in industrial automation. Its internationalcatalogue includes PLCs, numerical controllers, terminals,software, multiple fieldbus and ethernet communicationnetworks, and human machine interfaces (HMI).

Square D is a total quality organisation and its business is to put electricity to work productively and effectively,protecting people, buildings and equipment. Its low voltageelectrical distribution equipment, systems and services areused extensively in residential and commercial applications.

Telemecanique is a UK market leader and world expertin industrial control and automation. It provides completesolutions, with its range of components, programmablelogic controllers, variable speed drives and communicationssoftware. In addition, it offers power distribution throughprefabricated busbar trunking.

Get morewith the world’s

PowerControl

specialist&

Schneider Electric’s local supportSchneider Electric is committed to supporting its customers at every stage of a project. Our 180 sales engineers, the largestdedicated sales force in the UK electrical industry, operate from 4 customer support centres.

Our sales engineers are skilled at assessing individual re q u i rements and combined with the expert support of our pro d u c tspecialists, will develop the most effective and economical answer taking relevant regulations and standards fully into account.

To access the expertise of the Schneider Electric group, please call 0870 608 8 608. Each customer support centre includesfacilities for demonstrations and training, and presentation rooms fully equipped with audio visual and video, providingexcellent meeting facilities.

ScotlandSchneider Electric LtdUnit 11000Academy Business ParkGower StreetGlasgow G51 [email protected]

South WestSchneider Electric Ltd190 Park AvenueAztec WestAlmondsburyBristol BS32 [email protected]

North WestSchneider Electric Ltd8 Brindley RoadCity Park Business VillageCornbrook Manchester M16 [email protected]

Greater LondonSchneider Electric Ltd2nd Floor408 StrandLondon WC2R [email protected]

Industrial processes and machines product showroomSchneider Electric Ltd, University of Warwick Science Park, Sir William Lyons Road, Coventry CV4 7EZ

Commercial and industrial buildings product showroomSchneider Electric Ltd, Fordhouse Road, Wolverhampton WV10 9ED

Energy and infrastructure product showroomSchneider Electric Ltd, 123 Jack Lane, Hunslet, Leeds LS10 1BS

Regional product showrooms

Local customer support centres

Fax 0870 608 8 6060870 608 8 608Nationwide support on one number - call the Customer Information Centre on

merlin gerin - yolabeckton.yolasite.com/resources/prism/7.1_7.2_7.3 mg mccbs...new compact ns,...

Documents